advertisement
Xerox 4050/4090/4450/4650
Laser Printing System
Command Reference
XEROX
April 1995
720P94020
Xerox Corporation
701 S. Aviation Boulevard
El Segundo, CA 90245
© 1991, 1992, 1993, 1994, 1995 by Xerox Corporation. All rights reserved.
Copyright protection claimed includes all forms and matters of copyrightable material and information now allowed by statutory or judicial law or hereinafter granted, including without limitation, material generated from the software programs which are displayed on the screen, such as icons, screen displays, looks, etc.
Printed in the United States of America
Publication number: 720P94020
Xerox® and all Xerox products mentioned in this publication are trademarks of Xerox Corporation. Products and trademarks of other companies are also acknowledged.
Changes are periodically made to this document. Changes, technical inaccuracies, and typographic errors will be corrected in subsequent editions.
This document was created on the Xerox 6085 Professional
Computer System using GlobalView software. The typeface is
Optima.
Introduction
Conventions
Related publications
Printing color jobs
1. System commands
Entering commands
Command summary
Commands
DCU
DELETE
DRAIN
DSR
EDIT
ENDJOB
FCG
FCHECK
FCU
FEDIT
FEED
FEX
FID
ABORT
ACCOUNT
ALIGN
BC, BT, and BX
BD
BF
CANCEL
CANCEL ENTRY
CLEAR QUEUE
CLP and CLUSTER
COMPRESS
CONTINUE
COPY
XEROX 4050/4090/4450/4650 LPS COMMAND REFERENCE
Table of contents
1-1
1-21
1-25
1-26
1-26
1-27
1-28
1-28
1-29
1-29
1-31
1-31
1-33
1-33
1-12
1-12
1-12
1-13
1-14
1-15
1-16
1-17
1-1
1-2
1-6
1-6
1-7
1-10
1-11
1-11 ix ix x xi iii
TABLE OF CONTENTS iv
FILE
FIX
FLF
FLOPPY
FONTS
FORMS
GRAPHIC
HARDCOPY
HIP
HIP ABORT
HIP CHANGE
HIP DIAG
HIP END or HIP EXIT
HIP HOST
HIP JOBS
HIP LOG
HIP OFFLINE
HIP ONLINE
HIP RESET
HIP SEND
HIP SHOW BUFFER
HIP SHOW ECHO SERVERS
HIP SHOW HOSTS
HIP SHOW JOBS or HIP JOBS
HIP SHOW LOG
HIP SHOW VERSION
HIP SJC
HIP SLC
HIP START or HIP ONLINE
HIP STOP
HOSTCOPY
IFU
IMAGE
INITIALIZE QUEUE
JOBS
LIST
LOGON
MOVE
MOVE #
OCS
XEROX 4050/4090/4450/4650 LPS COMMAND REFERENCE
1-53
1-55
1-56
1-56
1-56
1-56
1-57
1-58
1-49
1-49
1-49
1-49
1-50
1-50
1-50
1-50
1-65
1-66
1-67
1-72
1-73
1-74
1-75
1-76
1-45
1-45
1-46
1-46
1-47
1-47
1-48
1-48
1-34
1-36
1-36
1-39
1-43
1-43
1-44
1-44
OFFLINE
ONLINE
PROBLEM
PSC
PSTATUS
PURGE
RCU
REALLOCATE
REPORT
RESET
REVIEW
REWIND
RNAME
SAMPLE
SCALE
SCHEDULE
SECURE
SELECT
SEPARATE
SET QUEUE DISPLAY
SETTIME
SETTMO
SFC
SFS DISPLAY
SFS file-name
SFS HARDCOPY
SFS HOST
SFS TAPE
SFS !
SFT
SHOW QUEUE STATUS
SPACE n REPORTS
SPACE n PAGES
SST
START
STITCH
STOP
SUBSTITUTE
TAPE or CARTRIDGE FIND
TAPE or CARTRIDGE LIST
XEROX 4050/4090/4450/4650 LPS COMMAND REFERENCE
TABLE OF CONTENTS
1-99
1-100
1-101
1-101
1-102
1-102
1-103
1-103
1-91
1-92
1-93
1-93
1-93
1-94
1-94
1-98
1-104
1-105
1-106
1-109
1-109
1-109
1-113
1-113
1-83
1-85
1-85
1-86
1-86
1-86
1-90
1-90
1-76
1-77
1-77
1-77
1-77
1-79
1-80
1-82 v
TABLE OF CONTENTS
2. Editor commands
LPS editor
Sample editor sessions
TAPE or CARTRIDGE NEXT
TAPE or CARTRIDGE REWIND
TAPE or CARTRIDGE SKIP
TAPE or CARTRIDGE UNLOAD
TAPE or CARTRIDGE VOLINIT
TIME
TYPE
Conventions
Command summary
Commands
C
CE
CLEAR
CONVERT
COPY
D
DELETE
DISPLAY
DUPLICATE
EDIT
END
F
FID
FILE
FIND
FLOPPY
GET
GPCE
INSERT
KEYS
LIST
MERGE
MODIFY
MOVE
NOCONVERT
O
P vi
2-1
2-17
2-17
2-17
2-17
2-18
2-18
2-18
2-19
2-13
2-14
2-14
2-15
2-15
2-15
2-16
2-16
2-10
2-10
2-11
2-11
2-12
2-12
2-13
2-13
2-1
2-3
2-5
2-7
2-9
2-9
2-9
2-9
1-114
1-115
1-115
1-115
1-115
1-116
1-118
XEROX 4050/4090/4450/4650 LPS COMMAND REFERENCE
3. Font editor commands
Font editor
Font file editing sessions
Command summary
Commands
CHARACTER
CLOSE
END
FEDIT
HEXADECIMAL
INCLUDE
INPUT
OCTAL
OPEN
OUTPUT
RECODE
REORDER
SUBSTITUTE
PCE
REMOVE
RENUMBER
REPLACE
REVIEW
RNAME
S
SAVE
SCE
SORT
STEP
TAPE or CARTRIDGE EOF or NOEOF or ENDFILE
TAPE or CARTRIDGE FIND
TAPE or CARTRIDGE LIST
TAPE or CARTRIDGE NEXT
TAPE or CARTRIDGE REWIND
TAPE or CARTRIDGE SKIP
TAPE or CARTRIDGE UNLOAD
TAPE or CARTRIDGE VOLINIT
TYPE
TABLE OF CONTENTS
3-1
3-9
3-9
3-10
3-11
3-6
3-6
3-7
3-7
3-7
3-8
3-8
3-8
3-1
3-2
3-5
3-6
3-6
2-23
2-23
2-24
2-24
2-25
2-26
2-27
2-27
2-19
2-19
2-20
2-20
2-21
2-22
2-22
2-22
2-27
2-28
2-28
2-28
2-29
XEROX 4050/4090/4450/4650 LPS COMMAND REFERENCE vii
TABLE OF CONTENTS
4. Command file commands
Command file overview
Conventions
Command summary
Commands
;
*
@command-file.CMD
.ASK
.ASKS
.ASKV
.BCP
.BEZ
.BF
.BNZ
.BR
.BT
.BX
.CHAIN
.DEC
.DELAY
.EXIT
.HOME
.INC
.NO SHOW
.PAUSE
.QWAIT
.SETC
.SETD
.SETF
.SETT
.SETV
.SHOW
.WAIT
Glossary
Index
viii XEROX 4050/4090/4450/4650 LPS COMMAND REFERENCE
4-1
4-10
4-10
4-11
4-11
4-12
4-12
4-12
4-13
4-13
4-13
4-8
4-8
4-9
4-9
4-9
4-9
4-10
4-10
4-4
4-5
4-5
4-6
4-6
4-6
4-7
4-7
4-1
4-2
4-3
4-4
4-4
4-4
4-4
GLOSSARY-1
INDEX-1
Introduction
The Xerox 4050/4090/4450/4650 Laser Printing Systems
Command Reference provides a description of the available commands, including the logon levels, syntax, parameters, examples, and restrictions, if any.
Refer to the Xerox Dynamic Document Interface Option
Operator Guide for commands specific to the shared disk option of your laser printing system.
This reference is intended for users who have some experience using Xerox laser printing systems.
Conventions
UPPERCASE BOLD BLUE
UPPERCASE BLUE ITALICS
Lowercase black italics
This reference uses the following conventions:
Uppercase bold blue text indicates required characters or command keywords.
Uppercase blue italics indicate optional parameter keywords, characters, or values.
Lowercase black italics indicate variable parameter options,
(word, character, phrase, or value).
<>
...
Ellipses indicate that you can repeat a parameter option, or list a series of parameter options.
Angle brackets indicate keys on the system controller keyboard.
TERMINAL FONT
The carat character represents a required space.
Terminal or monospace fonts are used to represent LPS screen responses.
UPPERCASE Uppercase letters indicate command names and parameter keywords.
CAUTION: Cautions appear immediately before any action or omission that may result in damage to your equipment, software, or data.
WARNING: Warnings are associated with the safety of people, hardware or software.
XEROX 4050/4090/4450/4650 LPS COMMAND REFERENCE ix
x
INTRODUCTION
Related publications
You can find additional information related to the Xerox
4050/4090/4450/4650 LPS in the following publications.
Publication Number
Xerox 4050/4090/4450/4650 LPS Master Index 720P93070
720P22320 Xerox 4050/4090/4450/4650 LPS Bypass
Transport Instructions, V3.5/3.8
Xerox 4050/4090/4450/4650 LPS Bypass
Transport Operator Training Guide Flipcharts
Supplement
720P22340
Xerox 4050/4090/4450/4650 LPS Bypass
Transport Operator Training Guide
Supplement
Xerox 4050/4090/4450/4650 LPS Forms
Creation Guide
720P22330
720P93990
Xerox 4050/4090/4450/4650 LPS Forms
Creation Quick Reference Card
Xerox 4050/4090/4450/4650 LPS Installation
Planning
Xerox 4050/4090/4450/4650 LPS Message
Guide
Xerox 4050/4090/4450/4650 LPS Operator
Guide
Xerox 4050/4090/4450/4650 LPS Operator
Instructor Training Flipcharts
Xerox 4050/4090/4450/4650 LPS Operator
Instructor Training Guide
Xerox 4050/4090/4450/4650 LPS Operator
Command Summary
Xerox 4050/4090/4450/4650 LPS Product
Reference
720P93100
720P92990
720P93980
720P94000
720P22080
720P22070
720P93050
720P94060
720P93090 Xerox 4050/4090/4450/4650 LPS Print
Description Language (PDL) Quick Ref. Card
Xerox 4050/4090/4450/4650 LPS Print
Description Language (PDL) Reference
Xerox 4050/4090/4450/4650 LPS System
Administration Guide
Xerox 4050/4090/4450/4650 LPS System
Administration Quick Reference Card
Xerox Standard Font Library Font User Guide
Xerox Tape Formats Manual
Helpful Facts About Paper
Xerox Dynamic Document Interface
Command Summary
Xerox Dynamic Document Interface
Operator Guide
720P94090
720P94010
720P93090
600P86174
600P86175
610P50497
720P13680
720P13670
XEROX 4050/4090/4450/4650 LPS COMMAND REFERENCE
Printing color jobs
INTRODUCTION
If your 4050/4090/4450/4650 LPS runs software version V3.8 or
XDDI (monochrome version of a highlight color software), the print jobs you create with color commands print in black and shades of gray. Remember the following when printing color jobs on your LPS:
• You must recompile forms that use color commands on your highlight color printer.
• You must print the job you created with color commands to verify that the colors meet your requirements. Applications build color sets differently, resulting in color variation on the
LPS. If the print job does not meet your color specifications, adjust your color command selection and retry the print job.
• If your color print job calls for a solid color to print on a black background, the LPS could print the image as solid black.
XEROX 4050/4090/4450/4650 LPS COMMAND REFERENCE xi
1.
System commands
This section describes the system commands available for the
Xerox 4050/4090/4450/4650 Laser Printing Systems (LPS). System commands control the following functions:
• Loading the operating system
• Switching between online and offline processing modes
• Initiating jobs
• Building forms
• Modifying source files
• Requesting sample prints of data, forms, fonts, and logos
• Obtaining accounting summaries and other system output.
While print jobs are running, messages display concerning the status of the jobs and the occurrence of unexpected conditions, if any.
Entering commands
You can enter all system commands and options from the keyboard. Function keys, buttons, and the screen display may simplify some operations.
The system accepts commands whenever the following prompt displays:
READY FOR COMMANDS
Follow these steps to enter a command:
1. Enter the command in the format specified.
2. Press <ENTER>.
The <ENTER> and the <RETURN> references are interchangeable.
The command syntax is made up of two elements: the keyword and the parameters. All commands begin with a keyword, for example, SAMPLE (some commands have more than one keyword, for example, SUBSTITUTE INK). You may abbreviate the keyword using three or more characters, for example, SAM,
SAMP or SAMPL for the SAMPLE command, or SUB INK, SUBS
INK, etc., for the SUBSTITUTE INK command.
Parameters follow the keyword. Parameters are either required or optional. Follow these guidelines when entering parameters:
• Separate parameters by commas.
• Do not use spaces around the commas.
• Enter the parameters in the order specified.
• If you want to omit an optional parameter, you must enter a comma in its place in the command string.
XEROX 4050/4090/4450/4650 LPS COMMAND REFERENCE 1-1
SYSTEM COMMANDS
Command summary
If you encounter an error message after entering a command, verify the syntax or refer to the Xerox 4850/4890 Highlight Color
LPS Message Guide.
Table 1-1 provides a summary of the system commands. It includes printer status requirements and the lowest logon level
(by system default) from which a command is functional.
An asterisk after the command means that it is not functional when the Host Interface Processor (HIP) is running.
NR in the “Logon level” column means you cannot restrict the command.
1-2 XEROX 4050/4090/4450/4650 LPS COMMAND REFERENCE
SYSTEM COMMANDS
Table 1-1.
System commands
Command
ABORT
DSR*
EDIT
ENDJOB
FCG
FCHECK
FCU
FEDIT
FEED
FEX
ACCOUNT
ALIGN
BC, BT, BX, BD, and BF
CANCEL
CANCEL ENTRY
CLEAR QUEUE
CLP
CLUSTER
COMPRESS*
CONTINUE
COPY
DCU
DELETE
DRAIN
FID
FILE
FIX
FLF
FLOPPY
FONTS
FORMS
GRAPHIC
HARDCOPY
HIP
HOSTCOPY
IFU
Function
Aborts current job, report activity, queue entries, or processes.
Creates and updates the accounting file.
Aligns laser image with paper.
Boots the SAFES system.
Same as the ABORT command.
Same as the ABORT ENTRY command.
Erases all entries in the print queue database.
Assigns preferred trays to a cluster.
Assigns current trays to a cluster.
Compresses file directories and disk files.
Resumes input/output activities.
Copies files from disk/disk to disk/tape or cartridge.
Controls and processes logging activity.
Deletes files from system disk.
Prints all completed online pages.
Saves/restores disks.
Begins an editing session.
Prints all unimaged online pages.
Loads a third party communications profile.
Displays data about disk file allocations.
Converts files to monochrome color format.
Invokes the font editor.
Selects the active paper tray.
Generates a test case using Xerox and third party devices.
Creates a prototype command file.
Lists file directories on the LPS display.
Modifies fonts and logos.
Invokes non-specified floppy commands.
Invokes floppy commands at the system or editor level.
Sets the maximum number of active fonts.
Sets the maximum number of active forms.
Sets the maximum number of active graphics.
Prints a hardcopy of identified graphics.
Initiates Host Interface Processor commands.
Accepts/stores files transmitted from the host computer.
Invokes the Interpress Font Utility commands.
Idle
Idle
Idle
Idle
Idle
Idle
Idle
Idle
Idle
X
Idle
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
Idle
X
Idle
X
Idle
Idle
Printer
Offline Online
X X
Logon level
NR
Idle
X X
1
1
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
4
1
1
2
1
3
1
2
NR
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
2
1/NR
1/NR
2
XEROX 4050/4090/4450/4650 LPS COMMAND REFERENCE 1-3
SYSTEM COMMANDS
Command Function
Table 1-1.
RESET
REVIEW
REWIND
RNAME
SAMPLE
SCALE
SCHEDULE
SECURE
SELECT
SEPARATE
SET QUEUE
DISPLAY
SETTIME
@SETTMO
IMAGE Displays, fixes, or prints the contents of IMG files.
INITIALIZE QUEUE Initializes and sets up a new print queue database.
JOBS Displays job status information.
LIST Lists a hardcopy of file directories.
LOGON
MOVE
MOVE #
Determines access privileges.
Positions tape by blocks or files.
Reorders documents for printing.
OCS
OFFLINE
ONLINE
PROBLEM
PSC
PSTATUS
PURGE
RCU
REALLOCATE
REPORT
Displays key version numbers.
Sets the LPS to offline.
Sets the LPS to online.
Logs problem information for the service technician.
Downloads the PSC microcode to the printer.
Displays the status of the printer.
Clears data in unused disk sectors of the print file.
Restricts command usage.
Sets the size of the print file on the system disk.
Reports system activity and accounting.
Forces all system activities to cease.
Reviews file directories with optional delete.
Rewinds the tape.
Renames a file from one file name to another.
Prints samples and test patterns.
Converts files from 300 spi to 600 spi.
Checks or switches the QM modes.
Secures a file against unauthorized access.
Selects the active output tray.
Sends an output report to the other output bin.
Sets the information in the print queue display.
SFC
SFS
SFT
SHOW QUEUE
STATUS
Sets the current date and time.
Changes the maximum period the system waits before sending the DEVICE END status to the host.
Converts the QUE.SYS data file to STAFIL.SYS.
Controls print queue database activities.
Transfers a single file from a DSR tape to a disk drive.
Displays the status of the queue.
System commands (continued)
X
X
X
Idle
Idle
Idle
Idle
Idle
X
Idle
X
Idle
X
X
NR
X
Idle
X
Printer
Offline Online
X
X
Idle
Idle
Idle
Idle
X
Idle
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
Logon level
1
1
1
1
5
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
2
NR
5
1
1
1
1
1
2
1
2
1/NR
1
NR
1
1
X X
4
1
1
1
2
2
1-4 XEROX 4050/4090/4450/4650 LPS COMMAND REFERENCE
Command
SPACE
SST
START
STITCH
STOP
SUBSTITUTE
TAPE or
CARTRIDGE
TIME
TYPE
SYSTEM COMMANDS
Function
Table 1-1.
Positions the tape by logical reports or pages.
Creates a system software tape or cartridge.
Initiates a print job or prints a tape dump.
Staples a printed document.
Suspends input and output activities.
Identifies the tape or cartridge drive.
Manipulates the LPS-labeled tape or cartridge.
Displays the current time and status.
Displays a source file.
System commands (continued)
X
X
Idle
Printer
Offline Online
X
X X
X
X
Logon level
1
4 x
1
NR
1
1
X X 1
1
XEROX 4050/4090/4450/4650 LPS COMMAND REFERENCE 1-5
SYSTEM COMMANDS
Commands
ABORT
The following system commands are available for the Xerox
4050/4090/4450/4650 LPS.
Syntax
Parameter options
Considerations
Removes jobs from the system, aborts reports, or discontinues certain system processing: input, output, or both.
Ensure correct job status tracking for subsequent jobs by issuing the RESET command after aborting a job being printed
(processed by output).
The system handles job aborts in the following way:
• Job being received and queued for report preparation is stopped after the next data read and is removed from the queue, but data written to disk from previously processed jobs is printed.
• Offline job in the print queue is deleted. An online job in the print queue has been partially prepared for printing, and every page prepared for printing is printed.
• Job being printed is truncated, but remaining jobs in the queue are printed.
• Job is not deleted if it has one report in the input queue and other reports in the output queue: only the report in the input queue is deleted when the next print job starts.
ABORT job-id or ABORT value job-id
Aborts processing of the job specified by the job identification that is assigned to the job by the system.
value
I
Aborts input print processing.
O
Aborts the report currently being printed. Data processed by output is deleted; data processed only by input is not affected. When output processing resumes, it begins with the next complete report.
If you abort a tape or cartridge job, the system does not rewind the tape or cartridge. You must enter the REWIND command before entering the next START command, since a label error can occur if the tape is not at the expected position.
When input processing resumes, it begins with the next complete report.
ABORT stops other types of processes when no print processes are running. If you do not enter a parameter, this command aborts any currently active nonprint task, except the File
Conversion Utility (FCU).
To abort SAMPLE printing of files specified by a mask, enter
ABORT job-id to abort the job completely.
1-6 XEROX 4050/4090/4450/4650 LPS COMMAND REFERENCE
Examples
Syntax
Parameter options
SYSTEM COMMANDS
If two jobs have been started, one immediately after the other, and you want to stop the first while it is being prepared for printing, enter ABORT I rather than ABORT job-id. Then enter
ABO job-id after the message
OS1020 Job JID has completed input phase
is displayed for the first job. Or you can enter ABO
I , and allow output processing to finish processing what it received of the first job before input processing aborted.
Processing of the second job continues as expected.
If you enter ABO job-id while the first job is being processed by input, the second job is lost and a missing job number is noticeable after you start a third job. If the first two jobs are
Xerox Network Systems (XNS) jobs, the Host Interface Processor
(HIP) job queue shows the first as aborted and the second as queued, but the queued job cannot be accessed. To process it, enter HIP RESET and then resubmit the job.
Note: ABORT ENTRY is still a valid, supported command.
ABORT 5
0S0900 JOB 5 ABORTED
ABORT
OSO950 TASK ABORTED
The system accounting file is updated for the aborted job. User accounting pages print if output has been initiated for the job.
They are delivered for each report that input has read. If output has not been initiated, an accounting page is not delivered.
ACCOUNT
Creates and updates the list of user names for which accounting information is maintained, along with the PDL ACCOUNT statement. Refer to your Xerox 4050/4090/4450/4650 LPS Print
Description Language (PDL) Reference for information on the
PDL ACCOUNT statement.
ACCOUNT function
1 or ACCOUNT
,department
WRITE,data format,density,CLEAR or ACCOUNT LIST function
1
ADD
Adds a department name to the list of departments under which accounting information is maintained.
DELETE
Removes a department name from the list of department names.
department
Represents 1 to 31 alphanumeric characters (A through Z, 0 through 9, “:”), specifying the department. Must be the name specified in the DEPT command of the PDL ACCT statement.
function
2
LIST
Displays all the current departments. This has no meaning for data format, density, or CLEAR.
XEROX 4050/4090/4450/4650 LPS COMMAND REFERENCE 1-7
SYSTEM COMMANDS
Default
Considerations
WRITE
Copies the user and system activity data printed by the
REPORT command to an unlabeled tape. The 80-byte, unblocked record file starts at BOT and is terminated by two EOFs.
data format
EBCDIC
Specifies the data format as EBCDIC.
ASCII
Specifies the data format as ASCII.
density
1600
Specifies the tape recording density as 1600 in bits per inch (bpi).
6250
Specifies the tape recording density as 6250 in bits per inch (bpi).
CLEAR
Erases the accounting data after copying it to tape.
If not specified, the defaults are EBCDIC and 1600 bpi.
A department name cannot be deleted if data associated with the department exists in the SFS file.
ACCOUNT data can only be copied to an unlabeled tape.
Tape format of data written by ACCOUNT
The system usage accounting data copied to unlabeled tape consists of 80-byte records. Each record is identified in its first two bytes by a value indicating the information contained in that record. These two-byte identifiers are 10, 11, 12, 13, 16, 17, and
18. Records with identifier 14 are written to tape but do not contain currently useful information. The first four records are record types 10, 11, 12, and 13, which have the format structure shown in tables 1-2 through 1-5.
Table 1-2.
First ACCOUNT record
Bytes
0-1
2-10
13-20
21-79
Record contents
Identifier (10)
Date in DD-MM-YY format
Time in HH:MM:SS format
Unused
1-8 XEROX 4050/4090/4450/4650 LPS COMMAND REFERENCE
SYSTEM COMMANDS
Table 1-3.
Bytes
0-1
2-39
40-49
50-59
60-69
70-79
Table 1-4.
Bytes
0-1
2-6
7-11
12-21
22-26
27-31
32-43
44-49
50-59
60-69
70-79
Second ACCOUNT record
Record contents
Identifier (11)
Unused
Pages
Reports
Files
Jobs
Third ACCOUNT record
Record contents
Identifier (12)
Hours (input)
Minutes (input)
Unused
Hours (output)
Minutes (output)
Unused
Mounts
Blocks read
Blocks skipped
Paper path holes
Table 1-5.
Fourth ACCOUNT record
Bytes
0-1
2-26
27-31
32-41
42-79
Record contents
Identifier (13)
Unused
Number of blocks with CRC error
Blocks received
Unused
You can print the information in the first through fourth records using the REPORT ACTIVITY command.
Table 1-6.
Fifth ACCOUNT record
Bytes
0-1
2-79
Record contents
Identifier (14)
Unused
XEROX 4050/4090/4450/4650 LPS COMMAND REFERENCE 1-9
SYSTEM COMMANDS
ALIGN
1-10
Table 1-8.
Bytes
0-1
2-69
70-79
Table 1-9.
Bytes
0-1
2-79
The remaining records on the tape are sets of type 16, 17, and
18 records. Each set records the data for a department name and Job Descriptor Library (JDL) entry in the accounting log. You can print information in the sixth through eighth records using the REPORT USER command. These records have the format structure shown in tables 1-7 through 1-9.
Table 1-7.
Sixth ACCOUNT record
Bytes
0-1
2-32
33-34
35-39
40-79
Record contents
Identifier (16)
Department name
Unused
Pages to tray
Same as in second record
Seventh ACCOUNT record
Record contents
Identifier (17)
Same as in third record
Lines
Eighth ACCOUNT record
Record contents
Identifier (18)
Same as in second record
Syntax
Parameter options
Default
Aligns the laser image with the paper. The alignment values for each printer must be set at least once, but they remain relatively constant. The alignment values you enter are retained by the system until you change them.
ALIGN scans,dots,TEST scans
Specifies the number of scan lines (across a portrait page or down a landscape page) in dots. The range is 1 to 296, inclusive.
dots
Specifies the number of dots along each scan line (up a portrait page or across a landscape page) in dots. The range is 0 to 11992, inclusive.
TEST
Prints a TEST form.
The default alignment is 36 scans and 0 dots.
XEROX 4050/4090/4450/4650 LPS COMMAND REFERENCE
SYSTEM COMMANDS
Examples
Considerations
Syntax
Parameter options
Logon level
Considerations
Syntax
Parameter options
Logon level
Considerations
OS1000 READY FOR COMMANDS
ALIGN 80,24,TEST
ALIGNMENT IS 80 SCAN LINES AND 24 DOTS
ALIGN
ALIGNMENT IS 80 SCAN LINES AND 24 DOTS
ALIGN,16
ALIGNMENT IS 80 SCAN LINES AND 16 DOTS
Do not use the TEST parameter when the system is online. The system responds with the message
OS7400 INVALID JDE/JDL FOR
ONLINE PROCESSING
.
Do not request an alignment sample when a print job is in progress since the system resets the alignment without printing the test form.
Although any scan line increment can be used, the dots increment can only be in steps of 8 dots.
BC, BT, and BX
Boots your system from a tape or cartridge after powering on or pressing the Boot button. These commands also allow you to back up and restore files from a DSR or SST tape or cartridge.
There is no provision for the B command. Although any scan line increment can be used, the dot increment can only be in steps of eight dots.
BC or BT or BX
BC
Boots system software from a 1/4 inch tape cartridge.
BT
Boots system software from a 9-track or 18-track magnetic tape.
BX
Boots system software from a 1/2 inch 3480-compatible tape cartridge. (This command is only valid for V3.5.)
None.
The logon level is 1.
The system delays about 80 seconds before the
$READY prompt appears. When the system completes the booting process, it is automatically at logon level 1.
BD
Boots the SAFES system from the disk after powering on or pressing the Boot button.
BD
None.
The logon level is 1.
After powering on, the system delays up to 80 seconds before the
READY$
prompt appears. When the system completes the booting process, it is automatically at logon level 1.
XEROX 4050/4090/4450/4650 LPS COMMAND REFERENCE 1-11
SYSTEM COMMANDS
BF
CANCEL
CANCEL ENTRY
Syntax
Parameter options
Logon level
Considerations
Boots the SAFES system from a floppy disk after you power on or press the Boot button.
BF
None.
The logon level is 1.
After you power on, the system delays up to 80 seconds before the
READY$
prompt appears. When the system completes the booting process, it is automatically at logon level 1.
Logon level
Syntax
Parameters
I
Removes a job from the system, cancels a report, or discontinues certain system processing (input, output, or both).
Ensure correct job status tracking for subsequent jobs by issuing the RESET command after canceling a job that is being printed.
The logon levels are 1 through 5.
CANCEL [job-id|I|O] job-id
Stops processing of the job identified by the job identification number.
Cancels input print processing.
O
Cancels the report currently being printed. Data processed by output is deleted; data processed only by input or QM is not affected. When output processing resumes, it begins with the next complete report.
This command is the same as the ABORT command. Refer to the
“ABORT” section earlier in this chapter for more information.
Syntax
Parameters
Cancels entries in the queue. This command is the same as the
ABORT ENTRY command.
CANCEL ENTRY [ALL|resource attributes|#entry-string]
ALL
Cancels all entries in the queue.
resource attributes
PRIMARY COLOR
Cancels reports that require the specified primary color.
STITCH
Cancels reports that require stitching.
You can combine attributes using and (&) and/or (!) operators in the command. Refer to the examples below.
#entry-string
Cancels the entries in the queue which are specified by the
#n, #n-m, or #(n-m,o,p-r) format.
1-12 XEROX 4050/4090/4450/4650 LPS COMMAND REFERENCE
Example:
Syntax
Parameters
Logon level
Restriction
Example
SYSTEM COMMANDS
#n
Single entry (integer between 1 and 65535).
#n-m
One set of multiple entries (integers between 1 and
65535), n to m, inclusive.
#(n-m,o,p-r)
Multiple sets of entries (integers between 1 and 65535),
n to m, inclusive, o, and p to r, inclusive.
CANCEL ENTRY #65,#78,#81
CANCEL ENTRY #(65-71)
CANCEL ENTRY MAGENTA
All entries requiring magenta dry ink.
CANCEL ENTRY BLUE&-STITCH
All entries requiring blue dry ink and not requiring stitching.
CANCEL ENTRY BLUE!STITCH
All entries requiring blue dry ink or stitching.
CANCEL ENTRY (GREEN&BLUE)!-RED
All entries requiring green and blue dry ink or not requiring red.
CLEAR QUEUE
Erases all entries in the print queue database and resets warning and frequency flags by reinitializing the database. Warning flags indicate that the beginning of the file is about to be overwritten.
Frequency flags determine how often warning messages display.
CLEAR QUEUE [NOF|OWF|DWF|NWF:n.m]
NOF
Deactivates the warning and frequency flags.
OWF
Activates previous warning and frequency flags.
DWF
Activates default warning and frequency flags. The default values are: warning flags, 40, frequency flags, 3.
NWF:n.m
Sets and activates new warning and frequency flags. The n value indicates the threshold at which warnings begin. The
m value indicates the frequency of warning message display.
The logon levels are 2 through 5.
CLEAR QUEUE executes only when the system is not active.
If n=25 and m=3, warnings are displayed when 25, 22, 19, 16, etc. entries can be made before the end of the print queue database is reached.
XEROX 4050/4090/4450/4650 LPS COMMAND REFERENCE 1-13
SYSTEM COMMANDS
CLP and CLUSTER
Syntax
Parameter options
Cluster information
CLP defines or deletes preferred trays for a cluster, or displays all clusters with all their associated information.
CLUSTER establishes or deletes current trays for a cluster, or displays all information for all clusters with current trays.
A cluster exists permanently in the database if it has at least one preferred tray. If you delete the preferred trays of an active cluster by assigning them to another cluster with the CLP command, you can use the cluster until you delete its current trays by assigning them to another cluster with the CLU command.
COMMAND clustername autosize flag factor n
1...
n
ALL /NR n
SET
COMMAND
CLUSTER
Creates, modifies, or displays information for current clusters.
CLP
Creates, modifies, or displays information for preferred clusters.
clustername
Specifies a cluster by name rather than by tray number. The name must be 1 to 6 alphanumeric characters beginning with a letter.
autosize flag
/A
Sets the autosize flag to true. Available only with the
CLP command.
/-A
Sets the autosize flag to false.
factor
+
Adds trays as specified by the other parameter options.
—
Deletes trays as specified by the other parameter options.
n
1...
n n
Denotes a feeder tray on the printer by a number within the range 1 to 2 or 1 to 4.
SET
Assigns preferred tray status to all the preferred trays in the cluster.
ALL
Specifies the total number of trays on the printer. This is not a valid option when using the SET syntax.
/NR
Specifies that the assigned current trays are not removed from other clusters.
CLUSTER
Displays all tray information for all clusters with current trays.
1-14 XEROX 4050/4090/4450/4650 LPS COMMAND REFERENCE
SYSTEM COMMANDS
CLP
Displays all tray information for all clusters.
CLUSTER cl-name
Displays all tray information for the specified cluster.
CLUSTER n
Displays all tray information for all clusters which have the specified tray as a current tray.
CLP n
Displays all tray information for all clusters which have the specified tray as a preferred tray.
CLUSTER cl-name n
1
,...n n
/NR, CLUSTER cl-name ALL /NR
Assigns current trays to the specified cluster. ALL specifies all the trays on the printer. NR (not remove) specifies that the assigned current trays are not deleted from other active clusters. SET assigns preferred tray status to all the current trays in the specified cluster:
• CLUSTER cl-name SET/NR
• CLUSTER SET ALL /NR.
CLP cl-name /-An
1
,...n
n
, CLP cl-name /-A ALL
Replaces the preferred trays of the specified cluster with the specified trays.
CLUSTER cl-name + n
1
,...n
n
/NR
Adds the specified trays as current trays to the specified cluster. NR specifies that the assigned current trays are not deleted from other active clusters.
CLP cl-name /-A + n
1
,...n n
Assigns the specified trays as preferred trays to the specified cluster.
CLUSTER cl-name -n
1
,...n n
, CLUSTER cl-name -ALL
Removes the specified current trays from the specified cluster.
CLP cl-name /A -n
1
,...n n
, CLP cl-name /-A -ALL
Removes the specified preferred trays from the specified cluster.
COMPRESS
Identifies corrupted files and compresses files and directories. It is more efficient to identify corrupted files with the verification option of COMPRESS, delete the corrupted files, and then compress files.
A file may be corrupted when the sectors allocated to it have been allocated to another file or are also “bad block” areas. The
V option of COMPRESS generates the CPR000.TMP file to identify the first multiallocated sectors found.
If the multiallocated sectors are associated with bad block areas and a file, delete the file. If the sectors are associated with two files, use SAMPLE to print them to determine which file has been corrupted.
During the verification process to ensure that no sectors have been allocated to multiple files or to a file and a “bad block” area, the message
VERIFYING SYSTEM FILES
displays.
XEROX 4050/4090/4450/4650 LPS COMMAND REFERENCE 1-15
SYSTEM COMMANDS
Syntax COMPRESS,disk-id,disk-id,...,V
Parameter options disk-id
Specifies the disks (DP0:, DP1:, DP2:, or DP3:) to check for corrupted files, or specifies the disks on which files and directories are to be compressed.
Default
Considerations
V
Verifies the existence of unusable areas on the specified disk without compressing files.
The default is disk DP0.
COMPRESS displays the entered command syntax while it is running.
COMPRESS without the V option copies each file into one contiguous area, leaving one large free area. The following message is displayed during processing:
COMPRESSING FILES **CRITICAL OPERATIONS IN PROGRESS. DO
NOT DISTURB** **DISK WILL BE UNUSABLE IF PROCESS
INTERRUPTED**
After files in a directory are compressed, the directory is compressed, if possible. During this process phase the system displays the
COMPRESSING DIRECTORY SECTORS
message.
The system must be idle and the Host Interface Processor (HIP) must be unloaded; HIP EXIT or HIP UNLOAD is required.
Do not abort COMPRESS.
If the system was not rebooted after turning Data Capture on after the last system generation, the system may hang during
COMPRESS and require a reboot. Prevent this situation by rebooting the system immediately after turning Data Capture on, or by turning Data Capture off before running COMPRESS and turning Data Capture back on when COMPRESS has completed.
Figure 1-1 illustrates a disk error report.
Figure 1-1.
Disk compress error report
DISK COMPRESS ERROR REPORT
FILE IN ERROR
FDL.TSK
BAD BLOCK GROUP
UNIT
0
0
12 JUL 89
START LBN
2032
2189
10:35:14
SIZE
178
1388
000010
000020
000030
000040
000050
000060
CONTINUE
1-16
Default
Resumes input or output processing suspended by the STOP command or by the system report of an error condition. Since the system controls input and output activities separately, continuing input allows input data to process and spool to disk even if output is stopped. Continuing output alone prints or images existing pages even if input is stopped.
If you do not enter a parameter, this command resumes input and output processing.
XEROX 4050/4090/4450/4650 LPS COMMAND REFERENCE
Syntax
Parameter options
Syntax
Parameter options
Considerations
Example
SYSTEM COMMANDS
CONTINUE value value
I
Resumes input processing.
O
Resumes output processing.
Q
Restarts QM scheduling.
COPY
Copies files from:
• System disk to system disk, floppy disk, cartridge, or tape
• Floppy disk, cartridge, or tape to system disk.
The Xerox 4050/4090/4450/4650 LPS may use a 9-track magnetic tape or 18-track cartridge.
When using the input-file-id and output-file-id to rename a labeled file, only the RAD50 portion of the tape label changes; the American Standard Code for Information Interchange (ASCII) portion of the label does not change.
The file-id is recorded in ASCII in the 128-byte LPS label. The 6character ASCII file name begins in byte position 18. The 3character ASCII file type begins in byte position 27.
Although Operating System Software (OSS) supports multiple volume writes, the editor and Interpress Font Utility (IFU) tasks do not support them. Do not issue a multiple volume write from
EDI or from IFU. It may fail and corrupt the volume by jeopardizing the volume file integrity, and the Interpress file and font integrity. Avoid this problem by writing files to a single volume and selectively including files or font families.
COPY — disk to disk
Copies a disk file on the system disk.
COPY disk-id input-file-id disk-id output-file-id disk-id
Specifies the disk (DP0:, DP1:, DP2:, or DP3:) which contains the file to be copied (input), and the disk that the file is copied to (output).
file-id
Specifies the input or output file identified by file-name.file-
type. If the file type is omitted, the file type defaults to the file type of the input file. (Masking cannot be used.)
The output file name must be different from the input file name.
If the output file name is the name of an existing file, then the contents of the existing file are replaced by the contents of the input file.
EDIT>
COPY FORMA.FSL FORMX
>CREATING FILE FORMX.FSL
XEROX 4050/4090/4450/4650 LPS COMMAND REFERENCE 1-17
SYSTEM COMMANDS
Syntax
Parameter options
Default
Considerations
COPY — disk to labeled tape or cartridge
Adds the existing files on a tape. If there are no other files, the new files are written starting at BOT. The file-id is recorded in
ASCII in the 128-byte LPS label. The six-character ASCII file name begins in byte position 18. The three-character ASCII file type begins in byte position 27.
COPY medium WRITE /BF: or COPY medium WRITE n n LABEL
LABEL input file-id file output file-id medium
TAPE
Specifies that the file must be written to the labeled tape assigned to the TAPE keyword using the SUB DEV command.
CARTRIDGE
Specifies that the file must be written to the cartridge assigned to the CAR keyword using the SUB DEV command.
n
Groups disk blocks into one tape block. n can have a value of 1 to 16, and the size of the tape block, in bytes, resides in the tape label. The default blocking factor is 1, and the label indicates the blocking factor.
input or output file-id
Specifies the name of an input disk file and the name to be given the output tape file, in the form file-name.file-type.
(Masking cannot be used.) If no output file-id is specified, the disk file-name is used for the tape file. (Masking can be used.) file file-id
Specifies the disk file to be copied to tape. (Masking cannot be used.) file-type
Specifies the directory (CMD, CME, FNT, FRM, FSL, ICT,
IDR, ISL, IMG, JDL, JSL, LGO, MSC, PDE, TMP, TST, XCS,
IPM, LIB, STK, TSK, SYS, PCH, LOG, SAF, OSD, DAT, TPF,
IPF, and FIS) whose files are copied to tape.
ALL
Specifies that all user files with the file extensions CMD,
CME, FNT, FRM, FR6, FN6, FSL, ICT, IDR, ISL, JDL, JSL,
LGO, LG6, PDE, TMP, TST, IPM, MSC, IMG, LIB, STK, and
1M6 are copied to tape.
TAPE is the default medium.
Do not use COPY, TAPE, WRITE, LABEL, or ALL to copy user file versions between printers running different operating system software. This may result in incompatible user file types on the system disk.
When using the input-file-id and output-file-id to rename a labeled file, only the RAD50 portion of the tape label changes; the ASCII portion of the label does not change.
1-18 XEROX 4050/4090/4450/4650 LPS COMMAND REFERENCE
Syntax
Parameter options
Default
Examples
Considerations
Syntax
Parameter options
SYSTEM COMMANDS
Do not issue a multiple volume write from EDI or from IFU. It may fail and corrupt the volume by jeopardizing the volume file integrity, and the Interpress file and font integrity. Instead write files to a single volume and selectively include files or font families.
COPY — disk to unlabeled tape or cartridge
Copies source files such as .FSL or .JSL files to tape. Tape initialization (TAPE VOLINIT) is not necessary for an unlabeled tape. The tape write always starts at the current tape position and is terminated by writing two end of files (EOFs), backspacing over one of them when another file is written. This results in one EOF between each file, with a double EOF at the end of all the files.
COPY medium WRITE data format file-id medium
TAPE
Specifies that the file must be written to the labeled tape assigned to the TAPE keyword using the SUB DEV command.
CARTRIDGE
Specifies that the file must be written to the cartridge assigned to the CAR keyword using the SUB DEV command.
data format
EBCDIC or ASCII
Specifies the format of the tape to be written.
file-id
Specifies the disk file to be copied to tape. (Masking cannot be used.)
The data format default is EBCDIC.
COPY TAPE WRITE file.tmp, CARTRIDGE WRITE LABELfile.tmp
Specifies that the file must be written to the unlabeled tape or cartridge assigned to the TAPE or CAR keyword using the SUB
DEV command.
When you copy files to an unlabeled tape, the system does not check the tape position. The tape write always starts at the current tape position and is terminated by writing two EOFs, backspacing over one of them when another file is written. This results in one EOF between each file, with a double EOF at the end of all the files.
COPY — labeled tape or cartridge to disk
Restores tape files to disk.
COPY medium READ LABEL REVIEW disk id file medium
TAPE
Specifies that the input files or files come from the labeled tape file assigned to the TAPE keyword using the SUB DEV command.
XEROX 4050/4090/4450/4650 LPS COMMAND REFERENCE 1-19
SYSTEM COMMANDS
Examples
CARTRIDGE
Specifies that the file must be written to the cartridge assigned to the CAR keyword using the SUB DEV command.
REVIEW
Prompts you when the file on the tape would replace an existing file of the same name on the disk and requests whether to replace the file. If you respond with Y, the file on tape replaces the disk file. If you respond with N, the tape skips to the next file. Entering X aborts the entire copy process.
disk id
Specifies the disk file to be copied from tape or cartridge.
file
NEXT
Specifies that the next file on the tape will be copied to disk.
ALL
Specifies copying all the files on the tape or cartridge to disk, including the following files: CMD, CME, FNT, FN6,
FRM, FR6, FSL, IMG, IM6, JDL, JSL, LGO, LG6, MSC, PDE,
TMP, TST, ICT, IDL, ISL, IPF, IPM, LIB, STK, TSK, SYS,
PCH, FIS, LOG, SAF, OSD, DAT, TPF, XCS, and 1M6.
file-type
Specifies the file name in a tape directory to be written to disk, including the following files: CMD, CME, FNT,
FN6, FRM, FR6, FSL, IMG, IM6, JDL, JSL, LGO, LG6, MSC,
PDE, TMP, TST, ICT, IDL, ISL, IPF, IPM, LIB, STK, TSK, SYS,
PCH, FIS, LOG, SAF, OSD, DAT, TPF, XCS, and 1M6.
>
COPY TAPE READ LABEL OCRA.FNT
SEARCHING FOR FILE OCRA.FNT
CREATING FILE OCRA.FNT
(if the file is a new file and does not exist on the disk)
REPLACING FILE OCRA.FNT
(if the file already exists on disk and is overwritten)
The above command finds and copies the file OCRA FNT from the tape to disk.
If another file exists on this tape (after the one just copied), use the command COPY TAPE READ LABEL NEXT to copy the next file from tape and store it in a file-name.file-type, as specified in the tape label information.
The command COPY TAPE [LABEL] ALL copies all the files from the Xerox-labeled tape, stores them with the same file name as on tape and catalogs them by file type. After copying the files from an LPS-labeled file tape to disk, use the TAPE REWIND or
TAPE UNLOAD command to rewind the tape.
1-20 XEROX 4050/4090/4450/4650 LPS COMMAND REFERENCE
SYSTEM COMMANDS
Syntax
Parameter options
Example
Considerations
Syntax
Parameter options
COPY — unlabeled tape or cartridge to disk
Copies an unlabeled, unblocked, EBCDIC or ASCII, 9-track, and
1600 (or 6250 bpi) tape. The maximum record length is 150 characters, although only the first 72 characters of each record are entered into the disk file. A sequence number generates in bytes 75 to 80 of the disk file record. Records shorter than 72 bytes are blank filled to 72 bytes. The largest file that can be created is 5000 records.
COPY medium data format file-id medium
TAPE
Specifies that the file must be written to the labeled tape assigned to the TAPE keyword using the SUB DEV command.
CARTRIDGE
Specifies that the file must be written to the cartridge assigned to the CAR keyword using the SUB DEV command.
data format
EBCDIC ASCII
Specifies the recording format of the input tape. EBCDIC is the default.
file-id
Specifies the new file name as file-name.file-type. (Masking cannot be used.)
COPY TAPE UNSYS.JSL copies a file from an unblocked, unlabeled tape to disk. The disk file is named UNSYS and is cataloged in the JSL file directory.
The maximum record length is 150 characters.
The copy operation truncates each record to its first 72 characters.
Files with more than 5000 records are truncated to the first 5000 records.
DCU
Starts or stops logging all LPS console entries and system console messages. This command also creates the log file which automatically records all LPS console entries and system console messages for the specified number of days. You can specify that a message displays at the selected interval to indicate that console entries are being logged. The log file created can be displayed, printed, or backed up to offline media.
DCU CAPTURE — (V3.8 and XDDI)
DCU CAPTURE CONSOLE state
1
FOR n DAYS state
2 m
REMINDER
CONSOLE
Records all console activity.
XEROX 4050/4090/4450/4650 LPS COMMAND REFERENCE 1-21
SYSTEM COMMANDS
Default
Syntax
Parameter options state
1
ON
Logs the console data.
OFF
Ends console data logging. Does not delete the captured data or unload DCU as an active task on the printer.
n
Specifies the number of days to save console data. n must be an integer between 0 and 40. If DCU was previously turned off using RESET and then turned on again without specifying a value, the default would be 14 days. If DCU was previously turned off using either DCU EXIT or DCU CAP
OFF, then turned on again without specifying a value, DCU would be the last specified value.
state
2
ON
Activates the reminder message.
OFF
Deactivates the reminder message.
m
Specifies the length of the interval in minutes between each reminder message. Must be an integer between 1 and 254
(4 hours). The default is 60 minutes.
The default is ON.
DCU DELETE — (V3.8 and XDDI)
Deletes all of the data logged in the file, or deletes all data up to the specified date.
DCU DELETE value value
ALL
Deletes all data recorded in the log file.
ending date
Specifies the ending date in one of the following formats: mm/dd/yy, mmm-dd-yy, or dd-mmm-yy.
mm
Specifies the month with a number between 1 and 12.
/ mmm
Specifies the month with a three-character abbreviation: JAN, FEB, MAR, APR, MAY, JUN, JUL,
AUG, SEP, OCT, NOV, or DEC.
Date delimiter: a slash (/) or hyphen (-) is required with mm,dd,yy variables.
dd
Specifies the day of the month with a one- or twodigit number.
yy
Specifies the last two digits of the year. If you do not specify a number, the default is the current year.
1-22 XEROX 4050/4090/4450/4650 LPS COMMAND REFERENCE
Logon level
Default
Syntax
Logon level
Syntax
Parameter options
Logon level
Default
Syntax
SYSTEM COMMANDS
The logon levels are 1 through 5.
ALL
DCU EXIT — (V3.8 and XDDI)
Stops DCU and unloads the processing task from the system.
This frees up the memory used by DCU. To begin logging console data again, you must recreate the log file using the DCU
CAPTURE CONSOLE command.
DCU EXIT
The logon levels are 1 through 5.
DCU FORMAT CONSOLE DISPLAY — (V3.8 and XDDI)
Displays the data logged in the file.
DCU FORMAT date time
CONSOLE DISPLAY starting date time ending or DCU FORMAT CONSOLE DISPLAY LAST n
starting date, ending date
Specifies the starting and ending dates in one of the following formats: mm/dd/yy, mmm-dd-yy, or dd-mmm-yy.
mm
Specifies the month with a number between 1 and 12.
mmm
Specifies the month with a three character abbreviation: JAN, FEB, MAR, APR, MAY, JUN, JUL,
AUG, SEP, OCT, NOV, or DEC.
/
Date delimiter: a slash (/) or hyphen (-) which is required with mm,dd,yy variables.
dd
Specifies the day of the month with a one- or two-digit number.
yy
Specifies the last two digits of the year. If you do not specify a number, the default is the current year.
time
Specifies the hours, minutes, and seconds in the format
hh/mm/ss.
n
Specifies the last n minutes of captured data to be displayed.
You can specify up to 32767 minutes.
The logon levels are 1 through 5.
The default is 15 minutes.
DCU FORMAT CONSOLE PRINT — (V3.8 and XDDI)
Prints the data logged in the file.
DCU FORMAT CONSOLE PRINT value starting date time ending date time or DCU FORMAT CONSOLE PRINT LAST n
XEROX 4050/4090/4450/4650 LPS COMMAND REFERENCE 1-23
SYSTEM COMMANDS
1-24
Parameter options
Logon level
Default
Syntax
Parameter options
Syntax
Parameter options value
SIMPLE
Prints the log data in the abbreviated format.
COMPLEX
Prints the log data in the complete format.
starting date, ending date
Specifies the starting and ending dates in one of the following formats: mm/dd/yy, mmm-dd-yy, or dd-mmm-yy.
mm
Specifies the month with a number between 1 and 12.
/ mmm
Specifies the month with a three-character abbreviation: JAN, FEB, MAR, APR, MAY, JUN, JUL,
AUG, SEP, OCT, NOV, or DEC.
Date delimiter: a slash (/) or hyphen (-) is required with mm,dd,yy variables.
dd
Specifies the day of the month with a one- or twodigit number.
yy
Specifies the last two digits of the year. If you do not specify a number, the default is the current year.
time
Specifies the hours, minutes, and seconds in the format
hh/mm/dd.
n
Specifies the last n minutes of captured data to be printed.
You can specify up to 32,767 minutes.
The logon levels are 1 through 5.
The default is 15 minutes.
DCU HELP — (V3.8 and XDDI)
Checks the DCU syntax for the action you want to execute, and displays a list of all DCU commands and parameter options.
DCU HELP
None
DCU REMINDER — (V3.8 and XDDI)
Displays a reminder message on the system that indicates that data is being captured from the console in specified intervals.
DCU REM value state n value
ALL
CONSOLE state
ON
Activates the reminder message.
XEROX 4050/4090/4450/4650 LPS COMMAND REFERENCE
Default
Syntax
Parameter options
Logon level
Syntax
Parameter
Logon level
Default
Syntax
Parameter options
Example
SYSTEM COMMANDS
OFF
Deactivates the reminder message.
n
Specifies the length of the interval in minutes between each reminder message. You can specify from 1 to 254 minutes (4 hours and 14 minutes). If you do not specify a number, a reminder message will appear every 60 minutes.
The default is ON.
DCU RESET — (V3.8 and XDDI)
Deletes all the data logged in the file and stops DCU logging.
DCU RESET
None.
The logon levels are 1 through 5.
DCU SHOW — (V3.8 and XDDI)
Verifies that LPS console entries and system console messages are being logged.
DCU SHOW variable variable
STATUS
Summarizes the status of the capturing device, the reminder interval, and the retention period.
DATES
Displays the time period (to and from) of the captured data.
LOGS
Displays the first data file for every day that is captured.
VERSION
Displays console log version information.
The logon levels are 1 through 5.
STATUS
DELETE
Deletes files from the system disk.
DELETE disk-id file-id,file-id,...,file-id disk-id
Specifies the system disk (DP0:, DP1:, DP2:, or DP3:) which contains the file to be deleted.
file-id
Specifies the file as filename.filetype.
>
DELETE UNIVAC.JSL, FORMX.FSL
> UNIVAC.JSL. DELETED
> FORMX.FSL DELETED
XEROX 4050/4090/4450/4650 LPS COMMAND REFERENCE 1-25
SYSTEM COMMANDS
DRAIN
Considerations Never delete system (.SYS) files, in particular PRFIL1.SYS.
This command can be restricted to any logon level with the RCU command.
Syntax
Parameter options
Considerations
Prints all completed pages without ending the job in progress.
This command has an automatic drain feature that initiates the drain process after 5 minutes of inactivity on the online channel.
To change the time interval, use the @DRAIN command.
DRAIN
None.
If the print file has 5 or fewer pages, the pages may not print.
When entering this command, you may receive a message indicating that there are no pages waiting to be drained. This indicates that all the data received by the system has been formatted for output. Any pages formatted previous to the
DRAIN command are printed. This message may appear without entering the command if the autodrain feature is enabled.
There are situations where you may look at the system and see that there are pages in the output queue, but the system indicates that there are no pages waiting to be drained. The
DRAIN processing logic is performed from the input point of view. The job has completed the input phase, but the output queue may not yet have registered that there is data still available. AUTODRAIN will “wake up” and drain the system after a specific interval.
@DRAIN is the filename for a command file. Use this command file to change the timeout interval for the Automatic Drain feature for online printing. If you need to change the timeout interval, contact your site representative.
Once the command file is started, you are prompted for the new time, in minutes (between 1 and 255). After you have entered the new time, the system will apply the time and redisplay the
READY FOR COMMANDS message.
DSR
1-26
Syntax
Backs up the entire system onto tape or cartridge after a sysgen or a software update. The Disk Save and Restore (DSR) utility operates on the entire system in two steps: it creates a tape backup of all system files, and it restores those files to disk, erasing all previous disk contents.
Use the DSR tape or cartridge you create to boot the system (BT,
BC, or BX) after a system crash or after the loss of system files to restore the entire system. Although you can use DSR to correct disk fragmentation because the DSR restore copies all files to a contiguous area on the restored system disk, it is more efficient to use COMPRESS instead.
The disk or disks whose files are copied to tape or cartridge are the source disks. The disk or disks to which the files are restored are the object disks.
DSR medium 1600,disk-id,disk-id..., L
XEROX 4050/4090/4450/4650 LPS COMMAND REFERENCE
Parameter options
Logon level
Default
Considerations
Syntax
Logon level
Parameters
SYSTEM COMMANDS medium
CARTRIDGE
Specifies the device assigned to the CAR keyword using the SUB DEV command.
TAPE
Specifies the device assigned to the TAPE keyword using the SUB DEV command.
1600
Specifies a tape recording density of 1600 bpi.
disk-id
Indicates the disk (DP0:, DP1:, DP2:, or DP3:) whose contents are written to tape. If a DPn: is omitted, all disks are backed up.
L
Lists file information on the display as the system files are copied to tape. When several disks are backed up, this list can be extensive. No list is the default.
The logon level is 2.
The default is always 6250 bpi, even though the tape has been initialized at 1600 with the TAPE VOLINIT command.
This command is restricted to logon level 2.
You can run DSR only when there are no print jobs being processed.
A sysgen is required following a DSR restore if the configuration of the machine has changed since the save was performed or if the object system is different than the source system.
Frequently, a mini-sysgen is sufficient to correct the configuration, but a sysgen ensures that all the correct files are loaded on the system for the new configuration.
All the disk files are saved or all the tape or cartridge files are restored; DSR does not process individual files.
DSR preserves the machine-specific file (MCHID$.SYS) to prevent billing problems when you move files between systems.
If HIP is not active and jobs are pending in the queue, DSR runs, but it loses the HIP queue because HIP uses addresses that are unavailable during compression.
EDIT
Creates a source file, accesses a source file, or executes a file.
When you invoke the editor, it prompts you by displaying
EDIT
>. If you do not enter a parameter, this command creates an empty source file ready for input.
EDIT [disk-id][filename.file-type | @filename[file-type]]
The logon levels are 1 through 5.
disk-id
Refers to the system disk (DP0:, DP1:, DP2:, or DP3:) on which the file resides.
filename
Identifies a one- to six-character disk file.
XEROX 4050/4090/4450/4650 LPS COMMAND REFERENCE 1-27
SYSTEM COMMANDS
ENDJOB
FCG
1-28
Example file-type
Specifies the file directory under which the filename is cataloged.
@filename
Specifies that the editor is to retrieve commands from an editor command file. If no file type is entered, the system defaults to CMD.
You specify the filename (without the @) if the file is put into working storage.
OS1000 READY FOR COMMANDS (TIME) HH:MM:
Operator keys in:
EDIT SYSPDL.JSL
System prompt:
EDIT>
Syntax
Parameter options
Allows the system to begin a START command. ENDJOB marks the current LPS job as terminated and prints all the remaining pages in the print file. The ENDJOB command allows you to:
• Print a trailer banner to mark the end of a report
• Print a second trailer banner when the first is incompletely sent
• Work around multicopy disk saturation
• Respond to a MOUNT FORM message from an IBM host terminal
• Print the job accounting sheet.
ENDJOB
None.
Syntax
Parameter options
Logon level
Loads the personality profile (text file FCG.LIB) into printer memory that the LPS must use to communicate with the third party finishing device that is being configured into the printer memory. The personality profile is a text file called “FCG.LIB.”
Once this file is created, it is preserved across sysgens.
FCG or
FCG profile-label or
FCG SHOW profile-label
Specifies the entry in the FCG.LIB file to be recorded in the printer NVM (nonvolatile memory).
SHOW
Displays the current device settings (derived from the values currently in IOT NVM).
The logon levels are 1 through 5.
XEROX 4050/4090/4450/4650 LPS COMMAND REFERENCE
Considerations
Syntax
Parameter options
Logon level
Default
Syntax
Parameter options
Considerations
SYSTEM COMMANDS
If no parameter is entered, the profile labels in FCG.LIB are displayed.
Each of the parameter values coded in the FCG.LIB file must be within the range 0 to 255, inclusive.
FCHECK
Displays or prints file fragmentation data on a disk. It also lists unusable sectors identified by the sector check process during a full system generation. When bad sectors and fragmented files accumulate, you should purge and then compress the disk.
FCHECK also displays the MBAIS data indicating the areas that you should not use. If these are unused areas of the disk,
FCHECK displays “---” in the LBN column.
FCHECK /PR disk-id
/PR
Prints the information.
disk-id
Specifies the individual disk drive (DP0:, DP1:, DP2:, or DP3:).
The logon level is restricted to level 2.
DP0: is the default.
FCU
Converts forms, logos, and images (.FRM, .LGO, and .IMG) that are not in a color format to color format for monochrome printers.
When FCU converts files, the ink catalog and palette default to
XEROX.SIMPLE.
FCU file-id.file-type,’ink-name’,NOSUBSTITUTION file-id
Specifies the file to be converted.
file-type
Specifies the file type of the file to be converted. Must be
.FRM, .LGO, or .IMG.
’ink-name’
Specifies the defined ink to be used to print the form, logo, or image. Must be specified within single quotes. May consist of the ink catalog name, palette name, and ink name.
The default ink catalog and palette are XEROX.SIMPLE.
NOSUBSTITUTION
Specifies that FSL, JSL, DJDE, and SAMPLE ink overrides are ignored. The file can be printed only with the specified defined ink as rendered in a monochrome printer.
You cannot abort FCU. FCU terminates only when it finishes converting the specified files. If you need to keep image and logo files in the original no-color format for printing them on other Xerox LPS printers, back them up before converting them to color format.
XEROX 4050/4090/4450/4650 LPS COMMAND REFERENCE 1-29
SYSTEM COMMANDS
FCU printing results
FCU is unable to convert forms created under some older versions (pre-V10, specifically) of the LPS operating system software. If FCU returns an error message, you may need to recompile the form prior to converting it.
XEROX.SIMPLE is required for .IMG files and recommended for
.LGO and .FRM files.
You can use the asterisk wildcard character (*) only in the file-id
and only without other characters. For example, FCU
KOALA*.IMG,'RED’ is invalid, causing the system to display the message
FC6050 TASK ABORTED, FILE NOT FOUND
. The wildcard indicates that all files of the specified file-type are converted to color format using the specified ink-name. You cannot abort the wildcard option using the ABORT command.
XDDI—An FCU should be performed on all logo and image files when XDDI is installed. All FSLs and JSLs should be recompiled after the FCU is performed.
Converting all the form files, image files, or logo files can be time consuming if many files are converted.
The form or logo does not print in the defined ink. It prints in monochrome using the color that is used in the highest percentage to create the defined ink.
The image or logo files in a job print in their own internally defined color (rather than in the form color), unless the forms source library (FSL), jobs source library (JSL), or dynamic job descriptor entry (DJDE) statement invoking the image or logo file includes an ink override, and the defined inks are specified in the
.IMG or .LGO file without the NOSUBSTITUTION parameter.
The SAMPLE command with the INK parameter does not print an
.FRM or .LGO file in the specified ink unless the file is already in color format. (The SAMPLE command with the INK parameter always prints an .IMG file in color, regardless of whether it is in color format.)
If the .FSL file codes ink overrides for the .LGO or .IMG files it calls, then the SAMPLE command also overrides the internally specified inks for the logos and images in the form, provided that the defined inks are specified without the
NOSUBSTITUTION parameter.
Conversely, if the .FSL file does not code ink overrides for the
.LGO or .IMG files it calls, then the SAMPLE command does not override the internally specified inks for the logos and images in the form.
1-30 XEROX 4050/4090/4450/4650 LPS COMMAND REFERENCE
SYSTEM COMMANDS
Table 1-10 lists the hierarchy of ink overrides.
Table 1-10.
Ink override hierarchy for color format files.
NOSUBSTITUTE command specified
DJDE IDFAULT
IDFAULT of PDL OUTPUT
DJDE ILIST (first ink)
PDL IDR (first ink in ILIST)
.JSL files
.FSL files, .IMG files
.LGO files called by an .FSL file
.IMG files called by an .FSL file
NOSUBSTITUTE command specified
No overrides of .LGO files
Result
Overrides all else
Overridden by DJDE
Overridden by IDFAULTs
Overridden by DJDE ILIST
Overridden by DJDEs
Overridden by DJDEs
Overridden by .FSL file
Overridden by .FSL file
Result
No overrides of .IMG files
No overrides of .FRM files
Prints as specified internally or aborts job
Prints as specified internally or aborts job
Prints as specified internally or aborts job
Syntax
Logon level
Syntax
Parameter options
FEDIT
Invokes the font editor. For information about the available font editor commands, refer to the “Font editor commands” chapter.
FEDIT
The logon levels are 1 through 5.
FEED
Selects the input paper trays or makes the selection automatic.
The command options specify how the four input paper trays will feed stock to the job. FEED controls the primary source of paper.
If you do not select parameters, this command has no effect unless the current mode is FEED MAIN or FEED AUX. If the current mode is set to one of these, it switches to the other mode (FEED MAIN becomes FEED AUX, and FEED AUX becomes
FEED MAIN).
FEED keyword keyword
MAIN
Assigns control over the source of the paper to the input data. Ensures that all sheets designated with a stock name will be fed from the cluster associated with the page.
XEROX 4050/4090/4450/4650 LPS COMMAND REFERENCE 1-31
SYSTEM COMMANDS
Override sequence
Considerations
AUX
Feeds all the following sheets from the AUX cluster. This command overrides any job-specified feed source.
AUTO
The AUTO cluster is predefined to be all trays physically present in the printer. You can redefine AUTO as any tray on the printer.
tray-number
Feeds all the following sheets from the specified tray, regardless of the stock specifications in the FEED=
JDL/DJDE options. This command overrides any jobspecified feed source.
cluster-name
Feeds all the sheets from the specified cluster, regardless of the stock specifications in the FEED= JDL/DJDE options. This command overrides any job-specified feed source.
FEED commands override each other as shown below:
FEED MAIN
Gives the application control and feeds from the MAIN cluster unless the application overrides this command. The
FEED= option of the OUTPUT statement, the FEED= DJDE, covers, and RAUX pages feed from the clusters specified by the application. This is the normal operating mode.
FEED 1
Overrides all application FEED instructions.
FEED 1
All sheets feed from tray 1.
FEED AUX
Overrides all application FEED instructions. All sheets feed from the trays in the AUX cluster. (If the AUX cluster definition is not modified, this command is equivalent to
FEED 2.)
FEED 2
Overrides all application FEED instructions. All sheets feed from tray 2.
FEED n
Overrides all application FEED instructions. (This is the generic for FEED 1 and FEED 2.)
FEED cl-name
Overrides all the application FEED instructions except the pages to be fed from the AUX cluster. These pages are fed from the AUX cluster specified by the application.
FEED AUTO
Same as FEED cl-name. AUTO is a predefined cluster.
The MAIN cluster is predefined as tray 1 and the AUX cluster is predefined as tray 2. Either or both of these clusters may be redefined.
FEED 1 and FEED MAIN are not the same, even if the MAIN cluster consists of only tray 1. FEED 2 and FEED AUX are synonymous if the AUX cluster consists of only tray 2.
1-32 XEROX 4050/4090/4450/4650 LPS COMMAND REFERENCE
Syntax
Parameter
Logon level
Syntax
Parameter options
SYSTEM COMMANDS
Under certain circumstances, the automatic switching between two current FEED CLUSTER trays (for example, FEED MAIN, where MAIN=1,2) may not take place. Specifically, if one tray feeds empty and lowers at the same time as the other is being readied to feed, the printer may cycle down and display the following message:
OS2050 ALL APPROPRIATE TRAYS ARE EMPTY
. Load one of the trays to correct this condition.
If your system does not use English, you must rename the MAIN,
AUX, and AUTO clusters.
The cluster options now available change the execution of the local language commands for FEED MAIN, FEED AUX, and FEED
AUTO.
FEED AUX or FEED cluster-name affects paper feeding in jobs.
Only the English command FEED MAIN is overridden by the job
.JSL file or DJDE records.
You may set up clusters using the local language keywords for
MAIN, AUX, and AUTO so that the system processes print jobs with the same results as produced by OSS version 2 and earlier versions.
Generates multiple data set test cases through a third party finishing device that is connected to the printer.
FEX profile-label profile-label
Specifies the entry in the FEX.LIB file to be recorded in the printer NVM.
The logon levels are 1 through 5.
Each of the PARM values coded in the FEX.LIB file must be within the range 0 to 255, inclusive.
Never enter the RESET command while FEX is executing.
Otherwise, the test case profile on the printer NVM is not replaced by the profile of your device.
FEX
Generates a file consisting of a list of all disk files with the specified file type. You can use this file as a prototype command file because it contains one record for each file of the specified file type.
FID disk-id file-id file-type disk-id
Refers to the system disk (DP0:, DP1:, DP2:, or DP3:) on which the file resides.
file-id
Names the file to be created. If both the file name and file type are specified, the created file contains only the name of the specified file.
file-type
Specifies the file directory.
FID
XEROX 4050/4090/4450/4650 LPS COMMAND REFERENCE 1-33
SYSTEM COMMANDS
FILE
Default
Each record of the command file consists of a semicolon, a file name, a file type, and an asterisk (for example, ;GBAR.FSL*). You can edit these records to produce a command file which manipulates a subset of a file type (for example, deleting a subset of the current fonts in the FNT directory).
The default extension is .CMD.
Syntax
Parameter options
Logon level
Default
Displays the file names in the specified disk file directory. You can display specific file-ids within the catalog or the entire catalog.
FILE /EX or FILE disk-id
/EX
file-id,file-id,... disk-id
/SORT,filename.file-type file-id disk-id file-id /filename.file-
type,leading string,trailing string
/EX
Displays all the file characteristics of a given file-id. The display format includes a title line identifying the information in each column. The leading and trailing strings do not display. If you do not enter the /EX option, only the file-ids display.
disk-id
Identifies which system disk (DP0:, DP1:, DP2:, or DP3:) contains the file-id(s) to be printed.
file-id
Specifies the file as file-name.file-type. If omitted, the default is all the files in the directory. (Masking can be used.)
/SORT
Alphabetically sorts a list of files by type to be printed or displayed. Up to 3600 file names can be sorted. When this limit is reached, the message
FILE/LIST TOO LONG, ONLY FIRST
3600 FILENAMES WILL BE SORTED
. is displayed. On large disk and tape volumes, sort files by their file type.
leading string
A character string (except commas) that is added before each file name in the list that is created.
trailing string
A character string (except commas) that is appended to each file name in the list that is created. No more than 50 leading and trailing characters can be appended.
/file-name.file-type
Specifies a disk file which contains a record for each file listed in the following order: Lead str file-id Trailstr.
file-name.file-type
Specifies a disk file which contains the alphabetically sorted list of tape files.
The logon levels are 1 through 5.
The default file-type is .TMP.
1-34 XEROX 4050/4090/4450/4650 LPS COMMAND REFERENCE
Example 1
SYSTEM COMMANDS
Figure 1-2 shows a sample screen display when you enter the /EX parameter.
Figure 1-2.
/EX parameter sample display
FILE NAME
XRX.IMG
KI1.IMG
KI2.IMG
UNIT FSIZE RSIZE FFBY
2 6 512 512
2
2
8
21
512
512
0
0
EOF
6
8
21
DISK ADDR
472522
472530
472540
The parameter options shown in figure 1-2 are listed and described in table 1-11.
Table 1-11.
/EX parameter options
/EX parameter
FILE NAME
UNIT
FSIZE
RSIZE
FFBY
EOF
DISK ADDR
Description
One- to ten-character entry specifying the file name and type.
System disk unit number (DP0:, DP1:, DP2:,
DP3:) on which the file resides.
One- to ten-character decimal entry indicating the number of blocks allocated to the file.
One- to six-character decimal entry indicating the number of bytes in a record.
One- to six-character decimal entry indicating the first free byte in the last block of the file.
One- to six-character decimal entry indicating the end of file block number.
One- to ten-character octal entry indicating the starting address of the file on the disk.
The total number of files displayed, as well as the total number of disk sectors used by these files, is accumulated and displayed by file type.
The following message displays as each parameter on the file command is processed:
TOTAL OF n SECTORS IN m FILES
. n
The sum of the FSIZE field for all the files of a file-type requested by a parameter on the FILE command.
m
A decimal number that represents the number of files for the given file-type.
The following message displays when all the parameters on the
FILE command are satisfied:
GRAND TOTAL OF n SECTORS IN m FILES n
The sum total of the FSIZE field for all the files requested by the parameter string of the FILE command.
XEROX 4050/4090/4450/4650 LPS COMMAND REFERENCE 1-35
SYSTEM COMMANDS
FIX
FLF
1-36
Example 2
Considerations m
Decimal number that represents the total number of files requested by the parameter string of the FILE command.
During the search of the system file directories, if file catalogs are found to contain no files, this information is saved until all the parameter options of the FILE command have been completed.
The message
NO FILES IN TYPE file-type displays.
FILE DP0: *.SYS/SORT, SYSFIL.LST
This command creates a file called “SYSFIL.LST” which files on the DP0: disk. The file names in SYSFIL.LST are sorted in alphabetical order, and SYSFIL.LST is displayed on the screen. If the screen display of the sorted records is interrupted, then the created file “SYSFIL.LST” lists only the displayed file names.
You cannot display /EX file information for licensed fonts, logos, or secured files.
Syntax
Logon level
Parameters
Restriction
Modifies licensed and standard fonts and logos, and formats the font or logo matrix so it can be printed by your printer’s IG version.
FIX [file-type|file-id[,file-id,...]]
The logon levels are 1 through 5.
file-type
Specifies the file directory. Must be .FNT or .LGO.
file-id
Specifies particular files as filename.file-type. Must include the file type, which must be .FNT or .LGO.
Do not fix two color logo files because they cannot be printed correctly if processed by FIX.
Performs floppy disk related functions at non-print time. You can perform these functions at either high density (1.2 MB) or low density (720 KB).
Printers without the SCSI disk subsystem support floppy disks formatted to LOW density only. When compatibility with non-
SCSI disk controllers is important, the default LOW density format option must be used. The 4850 only supports the LOW density. The 4890 is the only current system with the new SCSI disk subsystem.
You can invoke the FLF task by entering FLF. The system then displays the FLF> prompt. Once you are in the FLF task, you can enter multiple commands at the FLF> prompt. When you have finished entering FLF commands in the FLF task, you must enter
FLF END to return to the system prompt:
OS1000 READY FOR COMMANDS
If you are entering FLF commands from within the FLF task, do not precede the keyword with FLF. For example:
FLF>
CLEAR
XEROX 4050/4090/4450/4650 LPS COMMAND REFERENCE
Syntax
Syntax
Parameters
Logon level
Syntax
Syntax
SYSTEM COMMANDS
You can also enter a single FLF command at the system prompt.
If you enter an FLF command at the system prompt, FLF must precede the command, for example:
FLF CLEAR
FLF CLEAR or ERASE
Erases all files on a floppy disk (except $Y$ files). You can also change the floppy disk label.
FLF CLEAR|ERASE
FLF CREATE
Creates a bootable floppy. This command formats and initializes
(if necessary) and copies the mini-loader and .SAF files to one floppy disk. If the floppy disk was previously unformatted or formatted at the incorrect density, the DENSITY and
SECTORCHECK switches are applied using the same definition as in the FORMAT command.
If the floppy disk is formatted and contains data, a warning message displays.
FLF CREATE [[DENSITY=LOW|HIGH]
[, SECTORCHECK=YES|NO]]
DENSITY
Specifies the density of the diskette being formatted.
LOW
Double density, double-sided. Formats a 5.25-inch floppy disk to 720 KB. This is the default.
HIGH
High density. Formats a 5.25-inch, high density floppy disk to 1.2 MB.
SECTORCHECK
Select the option to check the floppy disk for integrity.
Floppy disks formatted using this option may be more reliable, but the process requires more time. Yes is the default.
The logon levels are 3, 4, and 7.
FLF DUPLICATE or FLD
Duplicates a bootable or non-bootable floppy disk. This command automatically formats and initializes the target floppy disk to the same density as the source floppy disk (if required).
FLF DUPLICATE|FLD
FLF END
Terminates an FLF session.
FLF END
XEROX 4050/4090/4450/4650 LPS COMMAND REFERENCE 1-37
SYSTEM COMMANDS
1-38
Syntax
Parameters
Logon level
FLF FLB or SSF
Builds a System Software Floppy set from a System Software
Tape.
FLF {FLB|SSF} [[DENSITY=LOW|HIGH][,PRINT|
NOPRINT][,UNLOAD]]
LOW
Specifies double density, double-sided. Formats a 5-1/4 inch floppy disk to 720 KB. This is the default.
HIGH
Specifies high density. Formats a 5.25-inch high density floppy disk to 1.2 MB.
Spools a listing of each floppy disk to the printer. This is the default.
NO PRINT
Does not spool a listing of each floppy disk to the printer.
UNLOAD
Dismounts the SST when the task is complete.
The logon levels are 1 through 5.
FLF FORMAT
Formats and initializes a floppy disk for your LPS. You must format and initialize a floppy disk the first time you use it.
CAUTION: You must specify the correct density for your floppy disk; otherwise, you may cause unrecoverable bad block errors resulting in an unusable floppy disk.
Table 1-11 shows the correct floppy disk configuration.
Table 1-11. Floppy disk configuration
Syntax
Logon level
Parameters
Components
Sectors per track
Tracks per cylinder
Cylinders per floppy
Sectors per floppy
(One sector = 512 bytes)
Low density
9
2
78
1,404
High density
15
2
78
2,340
FLF FORMAT
[[DENSITY=LOW|HIGH][,SECTORCHECK=YES|NO]]
The logon levels are 1 through 5.
DENSITY
Specifies the density of the diskette being formatted.
LOW
Double density, double-sided. Formats a 5.25-inch floppy disk to 720 KB. This is the default.
XEROX 4050/4090/4450/4650 LPS COMMAND REFERENCE
Syntax
Example
SYSTEM COMMANDS
HIGH
High density. Formats a 5.25-inch, high density floppy disk to 1.2 MB.
SECTORCHECK
Select the option to check the diskette for integrity. Floppy diskettes formatted using this option may be more reliable, but the process requires more time. YES is the default.
FLF HELP or FLF ?
Displays a summary of the console commands.
FLF HELP
The FLF HELP display is shown in figure 1-3.
Figure 1-3.
FLF HELP display
FLF: Floppy Utility Help
Available Commands:
CREATE [DENSITY=LOW|HIGH][,SECTORCHECK=YES|NO]
Create a bootable floppy
DUPLICATE or FLD
Duplicate a floppy
END
Exit to operating system
ERASE or CLEAR
Clear all user files from a floppy
FLB or SSF [DENSITY=LOW|HIGH][,PRINT|NOPRINT][,UNLOAD]
Build a System Software Floppy set from a System Software
Tape
FORMAT [DENSITY=LOW|HIGH][,SECTORCHECK=YES|NO]
Format and initialize a floppy
HELP or ?
This screen
LABEL [“NEW LABEL”]
Label or relabel a floppy
Syntax
Parameter
FLF LABEL
Changes the volume label on a floppy disk.
FLF LABEL [“label name”] label name
Specifies the name of the floppy disk. The system truncates the name if there are more than 30 characters.
FLOPPY
Copies files to the floppy disk from any of the following directories on the system disks, unless noted otherwise: CMD,
CME, FNT, FN6, FRM, FR6, FSL, IMG, IM6, JDL, JSL, LGO, LG6,
MSC, PCH, PDE, TMP, TST, XCS, LOG, ICT, IDR, IPF, IPM, ISL,
FIS, TPF, DAT, OSD, SAF, LIB, STK, SYS, and TSK. You can initiate
FLOPPY commands at the system level or from the editor.
XEROX 4050/4090/4450/4650 LPS COMMAND REFERENCE 1-39
SYSTEM COMMANDS
Syntax
Considerations
Syntax
Parameter options
Logon level
Syntax
Logon level
The floppy disk drives can format, read, and write to low density floppy disks (720 KB: double-sided, 80 tracks, 9 sectors per track) and high-density floppy disks (1.2 MB: double-sided, 80 tracks, 15 sectors per track).
The system default is set to low density but changes to high density when the system:
• Formats a floppy disk at high density.
• Reads a file from, or copies a file to, a loaded high density floppy disk.
FLOPPY CLEAR
Deletes all files (except .$Y$ files) from the floppy disk.
FLOPPY CLEAR
FLOPPY CLEAR functions correctly only if the system has initialized the floppy disk.
FLOPPY DELETE
Erases a file on the floppy disk.
FLOPPY DELETE file-id file-id
Specifies the file to be erased. Masking is permitted.
The logon levels are 1 through 5.
FLOPPY FCHECK
Determines how many breaks the floppy disk files have and how many unusable sectors the floppy disk has. You can also check the following:
• Number of sectors available for each group of contiguous, available sectors.
• Total number of available sectors that occur in groups of three or fewer sectors.
• Total number of available sectors that occur in groups of five or fewer sectors (includes the count of groups of three sectors or fewer).
• Number of available sectors on the floppy disk. This is the total amount of floppy disk space that is available for files.
• Largest available space on the floppy disk. This is the size of the largest file that can currently be copied to the floppy.
• List of the sectors that were logged as bad by the sector check process during initialization of the floppy disk.
FLOPPY FCHECK
The logon level is restricted to logon level 3.
1-40 XEROX 4050/4090/4450/4650 LPS COMMAND REFERENCE
SYSTEM COMMANDS
Syntax
Parameter options
Considerations
Syntax
Considerations
Syntax
Parameter options
Considerations
FLOPPY FILE
Displays a list of the files on the floppy disk, and checks how many files are on the floppy disk and how many files of each file type are on the floppy disk.
FLOPPY FILE file-type file-type
Checks whether any of the specified files are on the floppy disk.
The names of all the files in each directory are listed if no parameter is given. (Masking can be used.)
FLOPPY FORMAT
Formats and initializes a floppy disk for your LPS. The floppy disk has 1404 available sectors for low density (2340 for high density)
18 sectors/track low density (30 sectors/track high density) when formatted. The sector configuration is 78 cylinders, 2 tracks per cylinder, 18 sectors per cylinder, and 512 bytes per sector. The format mode is double-sided, dual-density.
FLOPPY FORMAT
You must format and initialize a floppy disk the first time it is used.
FLOPPY LIST
Prints a list of the files in each directory. It also provides filerelated information. If you do not enter a parameter, this command lists all the files in each directory. You can use masking for this application.
FLOPPY LIST file-id file-id
Specifies the file as file-name.file-type.
The total number of files listed as well as the total number of disk sectors used by these files are accumulated and listed by file type.
As each parameter on the file command is processed, the following message appears:
TOTAL of n SECTORS IN m FILES n Represents the sum of the FSIZE field for all the files of a file type requested by a parameter on the FILE command.
m Represents a decimal number that represents the number of files for the given file type.
The
GRAND TOTAL n SECTORS IN m FILES
message appears when all of the parameter options of the FILE command are satisfied.
n Represents the sum total of the FSIZE field for all the files requested by the parameter string of the FILE command.
m Represents a decimal number that represents the total number of files requested by the parameter string of the FILE command.
XEROX 4050/4090/4450/4650 LPS COMMAND REFERENCE 1-41
SYSTEM COMMANDS
Syntax
Parameter options
Syntax
Parameter options
During the search of the system file directories, if file catalogs are found to contain no files, this information is saved until all of the parameter options of the FILE command have been completed.
The
NO FILES IN TYPE file-types message is printed on the output page.
FLOPPY RESTORE
Copies files from the floppy disk to the system disk.
FLOPPY RESTORE REVIEW disk-id file
REVIEW
Prompts you to confirm or stop restoration of a tape file which will overwrite a disk file.
disk-id
Identifies to which system disk (DP0:, DP1:, DP2:, or DP3:) the file is copied.
file
file-id, input-file-id, output-file-id
Copies the specified file. File name and extension can be specified. (Masking can be used when the output file name will be the same as the input file name.) file-type
Copies all files with the specified file extension.
ALL
Copies to the system disk all files with the following file extensions: CMD, CME, FNT, FN6, FRM, FR6, FSL, ICT,
IDR, ISL, IMG, IM6, JDL, JSL, LGO, LG6, MSC, PCH, PDE,
TMP, TST, XCS, SYS, TSK, LOG, IPM, FIS, IPF, TPF, DAT,
OSD, SAF, LIB, STK, and 1M6.
FLOPPY SAVE
Copies one or more files from system disk to the floppy disk.
FLOPPY SAVE REVIEW disk-id file
REVIEW
Prompts you to confirm overwriting a floppy file by a system file. Disk is overwritten. If you enter N, the specified process skips to the next file on the system disk.
disk-id
Identifies which system disk (DP0:, DP1:, DP2:, or DP3:) contains the files to save. If you do not specify a disk id, all disks are searched.
file file-id or input-file-id or output-file-id
Specifies the file as file-name.file-type. You can use masking if different file ids are not specified for input and output.
filetype
Specifies one of the following: CMD, CME, FNT, FN6,
FRM, FR6, FSL, ICT, IDR, ISL, IMG, IM6, JDL, JSL, LGO,
LG6, MSC, PDE, TMP, XCS, SYS, TSK, LOG, IPM, FIS, IPF,
TPF, DAT, OSD, SAF, LIB, STK, PCH, or TST.
1-42 XEROX 4050/4090/4450/4650 LPS COMMAND REFERENCE
Logon level
Considerations
Syntax
Parameter options
Default
Recommendation
Considerations
Syntax
Parameter options
Default
Recommendations
SYSTEM COMMANDS
ALL
Saves all files on the floppy disk: CMD, CME, FNT, FN6,
FRM, FR6, FSL, ICT, IDR, ISL, IMG, IM6, JDL, JSL, LGO,
LG6, MSC, PDE, TMP, TST, LIB, STK, and 1M6.
The logon levels are 1 through 5.
Backing up files may exceed the storage capacity of a single floppy disk.
FONTS
Optimizes the reallocation of task memory by specifying the maximum number of fonts that the system attempts to keep resident in memory during a print job. This value can have a significant impact on system performance for some jobs. The
FONTS value remains in effect until you reissue the command or regenerate a new operating system.
FONTS n n
Number between 1 and 128, inclusive, which sets the maximum number of active fonts per print job. Must include all fonts, logos, and inks used on the forms and variable data.
The default is 32.
Specify more fonts than will be used on a single page to allow font changes on a page-to-page basis without throughput degradation if all the fonts can be loaded into memory.
A print job may actually use more than the specified number of fonts as long as no more than this number of fonts is called for on a single page.
If the current FONTS value is exceeded while processing a page, the system aborts that job and displays the following message:
OS2885 MAX NUMBER OF FONTS EXCEEDED. ENTER NEW VALUE.
RESTART JOB
.
The value currently in effect displays if no parameter is given.
FORMS
Optimizes the allocation of task memory by specifying the maximum number of forms that the system attempts to keep resident in memory during a print job. This value can have a significant impact on system performance for some jobs. The
FORMS value remains in effect until you reissue the command or a new operating system is generated.
FORMS n n
Sets the maximum number of active forms per print job.
Must be a number between 1 and 64, inclusive.
The default is 12.
Specify more forms than will be used on a single page to allow form changes on a page-to-page basis without throughput degradation if all the forms can be loaded into memory.
XEROX 4050/4090/4450/4650 LPS COMMAND REFERENCE 1-43
SYSTEM COMMANDS
GRAPHIC
Considerations
If a form uses many inks, decrease the number of specified
FORMS to increase the memory available for processing.
The value currently in effect displays if no parameter is given.
Syntax
Parameter options
Considerations
Optimizes the allocation of task memory by specifying the maximum number of graphics that the system attempts to keep resident in memory during a print job. This value can have a significant impact on system performance for some jobs. The
GRAPHIC value remains in effect until you reissue the command or a new operating system is generated.
GRAPHIC n n
Specifies the maximum number of active graphics per print job. Must be an integer between 32 and 128.
No single page printed can invoke more than 32 graphics. You must include all graphics used on a form for this page if a form is used.
A print job can use more than the specified number of graphics as long as no more than 32 are called for on a single page.
The value currently in effect displays if no parameter is given.
HARDCOPY
Syntax
Parameter options
This command is used to sample graphic image files.
This command differs from SAMPLE only in the content and format of the descriptor page. The hardcopy descriptor page reports all the information in a graphic file header block. The information on a sample descriptor page is a subset of the information on a hardcopy descriptor page. Descriptor pages are numbered evenly, and any errors entered on the Interpress exception page are referenced to the page number on the descriptor page.
HARDCOPY file-
name.IMG,D,copies,vpos[in/cm/dots],n[/d],hpos[in/cm/dots],orien tation file-name
Identifies the graphic to hard copy. If you omit the file-
name, all image files are hard copy.
If you specify any other file type, the command is executed as if it were a SAMPLE command with a corresponding descriptor page, and the graphic is positioned by using default rather than specified positioning parameters.
D
Prints the graphic statistical information (the descriptive data page) on the back of the sheet and the graphic image on the front. The default is simplex.
copies
Specifies the number of copies. The default is one copy.
1-44 XEROX 4050/4090/4450/4650 LPS COMMAND REFERENCE
Default
Syntax
SYSTEM COMMANDS vpos
Specifies the vertical position of the top edge of the graphic, relative to the physical page origin in dots, centimeters (cm), or inches (in), specified as a decimal number with up to three digits to the right of the decimal point. If you do not specify units, inches are assumed. The default is two-thirds up the page and centered in the given orientation.
hpos
Specifies the horizontal position of the left edge of the graphic relative to the physical page origin. The form of this specification (cm, in, dots) is the same as for vpos. The default is two-thirds up the page and centered in the given orientation.
orientation
L or P
Specifies a reference orientation (landscape or portrait) for positioning the graphic. The default orientation may be specified in the image file image header.
n[/d]
Specifies the reference scale factor. Each parameter, n and d, must be an integer between 1 and 8 inclusive, resulting in a reference scale factor between 1/8 and 8 inclusive. The reference allowing a reference scale factor is multiplied with that specified at the time the graphic was digitized, and the product is rounded to the nearest integer in the range 1 to 8. That integer becomes the effective scale factor with which the graphic is imaged. If the reference scale factor specified in the HARDCOPY command is too large (so that the graphic exceeds the page size), the specified reference scale factor is flagged with an asterisk on the descriptor page and a reference scale factor of 1 is used. Not supported for RES files.
If you do not specify an orientation, the default is P (portrait).
Hardcopy print is not allowed if the image is protected by a security command in the ABNORMAL statement (such as
ABNORMAL SECURITY=YES).
Do not use HARDCOPY *.IMG.
HIP
Starts the HIP task with the default specified host as defined in
HIP.LIB. This is the abbreviated way of entering HIP ONLINE and
HIP START.
When entering HIP commands, multiple parameter options in a command string must be separated by semicolons. This does not apply to the keywords in a command. For example, in the
HIP OFFLINE command, both words are keywords, so they are separated by a space.
HIP ABORT
Removes all jobs or the specified jobs from the host interface processor (HIP) internal queue.
HIP ABORT SEND keyword
XEROX 4050/4090/4450/4650 LPS COMMAND REFERENCE 1-45
SYSTEM COMMANDS
Parameter options
Considerations
SEND
Aborts a HIP-to-host file transmission.
keyword
ALL
Aborts all host-to-HIP file transmissions.
jid
Specifies the name of the file to abort.
You cannot abort queued and active jobs. You can only abort jobs being received or pending.
If listed jid is not eligible, it will be listed in an error message.
HIP CHANGE
Syntax
Parameter options
Considerations
Stores an HIP-spooled data file as a standard printer file on disk to print later. A successful CHANGE will show a status of
STORED in the HIP JOBS display, and the LPS will not print the job using HIP.
HIP CHANGE jid TO file-name.file-type jid
Specifies the name of the file to store on the disk.
file-name
Renames the file you are storing on the disk.
file-type
Specifies one of the following: CMD, CME, FNT, FN6, FRM,
FR6, FSL, ICT, IDR, ISL, IMG, IM6, JDL, JSL, LGO, LG6, MSC,
PDE, TMP, XCS, SYS, TSK, LOG, IPM, FIS, IPF, TPF, DAT, OSD,
SAF, LIB, STK, PCH, or TST.
You can process only one HIP CHANGE command at a time.
The file-type XCS must be coded in the ACCEPT command in the
HIP.LIB file to be a valid file-type. Only file-types listed in the
ACCEPT command defined in HIP.LIB can be made standard disk files.
If you use a file-name, you must specify the complete syntax, with or without the file-type.
The input HIP data file must be received completely and in the
PENDING state, with HIP in the STOP state.
The output file name must be unique on the disk.
Before issuing HIP CHANGE, you must issue HIP STOP.
Only a file in PENDING state may be stored for printing later.
HIP DIAG
Runs three HIP interface tests with the 871 communication module (871-CM). These tests run automatically in sequence.
The first test verifies the functionality of the ONLINE,
ATTENTION, and HOSTCLR control lines. Any problem is reported by a system message. If a problem exists, tests 2 and 3 are not executed.
1-46 XEROX 4050/4090/4450/4650 LPS COMMAND REFERENCE
Syntax
Parameter options
Default
Considerations
Syntax
Syntax
Parameter options
SYSTEM COMMANDS
The second test checks control and data lines to verify that the
871-CM can send commands to the system and receive status data from the system. If a control line problem exists, this test is not executed. If a data line problem exists, the third test is executed.
The third test verifies whether the eight parallel data lines are functioning. Any reported problem provides a message and terminates testing. If no problems are found, testing repeats the specified number of times or is terminated by an HIP command.
HIP DIAG value value n
Specifies how many iterations the test executes.
LOOP
Specifies an infinite number of test iterations.
The default is 1.
HIP must be offline. Print processing must be stopped.
The 871-CM must be in diagnostic mode when you enter the
HIP DIAG command.
HIP END or HIP EXIT
Terminates HIP processing properly. You can use HIP EXIT and
HIP END interchangeably. It executes a HIP STOP followed by
OFFLINE. When the current files being received or transmitted and printed (if any) are completed, the internal job queue is saved on the system disk for later restart.
HIP END or HIP EXIT
HIP HOST
Selects an HIP communication mode when your LPS configuration has more than one host. On systems with only one host, HIP automatically selects the host each time HIP is loaded if the HOST default in HIP.LIB is the configured host.
HIP HOST mode mode
871
Enables communication between a host and the LPS in an
SNA/SDLC or BSC environment.
XNS
Enables communication between devices (such as workstations and graphic stations) on a shared or unshared, but accessible, network and the LPS. Ethernet is the physical connection for the network. Interpress is the page description language used to package files for transmission over the network to the LPS.
XEROX 4050/4090/4450/4650 LPS COMMAND REFERENCE 1-47
SYSTEM COMMANDS
HIP JOBS
HIP LOG
Considerations
DMR
Receives input directly from a VAX/VMS system. This permits data transmission to the LPS in a digital data communication message protocol (DDCMP) environment. All UNIBUS-, VAX-B1-, or Q-BUS-based digital processors are supported.
XPF
Enables communication between a host and the LPS in an
IBM MVS/XA environment.
HIP must be offline and idle to switch from one host to another.
You can run online jobs from an IBM 3211 channel when the
871-CM or XNS host has been selected, but not if the XPAF host has been selected.
If the host you specify does not exist on the system, this command is ignored.
If the system is not offline or idle, the command is rejected and one or more of the following messages displays:
HP1265 ONLINE INTERFACE ALREADY IN USE.
HP2020 SELECTED HOST NOT PRESENT ON SYSTEM.
HP2400 HIP INTERFACE MUST BE OFFLINE. ENTER ‘HIP
OFFLINE’.
HP7100 CANNOT CHANGE HOSTS WHILE JOBS ARE PENDING OR
ACTIVE.
This command is identical to the HIP SHOW JOBS command.
You can use HIP JOBS and HIP SHOW JOBS interchangeably to check the status of jobs in the queue.
Syntax
Parameter options
HIP LOG checks the XNS log filing.
HIP LOG function function
RESET
Resets the log file to zero. The following message displays:
HP0130 LOG FILE RESET
START
Initiates the logging of remote procedure calls. The following message displays:
HP0030 LOGGING ENABLED
STOP
Prevents logging of remote procedure calls. The following message displays:
HP0031 LOGGING DISABLED
1-48 XEROX 4050/4090/4450/4650 LPS COMMAND REFERENCE
Consideration
Syntax
Parameter options
Consideration
Syntax
Logon level
Syntax
Considerations
Syntax
Parameter options
SYSTEM COMMANDS
If you do not specify a parameter, one of the following messages is displayed:
HP0030 LOGGING ENABLED
HP0031 LOGGING DISABLED
HIP OFFLINE
Enables the system to go offline from a host and stop accepting jobs. The system completes the transmission of any jobs that are in the process of being sent before executing this command.
HIP OFFLINE IMMEDIATE
IMMEDIATE
Enables the system to go offline without waiting for the end of transmission from the host. This option should be used only when the host has crashed during the transmission of a job and no other means can be used to reestablish or terminate communications.
This option is valid only when online to an XPAF or XPSM host.
HIP ONLINE
Use this command to start the HIP task with the default specified host as defined in HIP.LIB. During HIP processing, the ONLINE command is not available. Enter HIP alone to invoke both the
HIP ONLINE and the HIP START commands.
HIP ONLINE [ALL]
ALL
Specifies that both print and nonprint files are accepted.
The logon levels are 1 through 5.
HIP RESET
Clears the HIP queue.
HIP RESET
The system does not execute the command unless the HIP queue has no jobs in the PENDING, QUEUED, ACTIVE,
OQUEUED, or PRINTING states. If you enter the command with jobs in the queue in any of these states, the system displays a message indicating that the queue cannot be cleared.
In the normal mode, the system accepts this command only when HIP is offline.
HIP SEND
Sends files to the host through the host interface.
HIP SEND filename.type filename.type
Specifies the name and extension of the file to send. You may use the masking specification (* or ?) to send multiple files of a specific type.
XEROX 4050/4090/4450/4650 LPS COMMAND REFERENCE 1-49
SYSTEM COMMANDS
Considerations
HIP SHOW BUFFER
Syntax
Displays a message on the system controller display showing the current status of the HIP spooling buffer.
HIP SHOW BUFFER
HIP SHOW ECHO SERVERS
Syntax
Logon level
Use this command to display a list of the echo servers that are available to run an XNS echo test. The listing shows the userdefined name and the Ethernet address of each echo server.
This information is defined in the HIP.LIB configuration file.
HIP SHOW ECHOSERVERS
The logon levels are 1 through 5.
HIP SHOW HOSTS
The ability to send files to the host depends on the host:
• 871-CM does not support this capability.
• You may initiate file transfers to a DMR host either at the host or at the LPS. Both the host and the LPS must be online and in an idle state (no files being transferred).
• You must initiate file transfers to an XNS, XPAF, or XPSM host from the host.
Displays a message on the system controller display that lists the available hosts. The message also indicates the currently selected host using an arrow, as shown in the following example:
HP 1340 Known and current HOSTs are:
871 DMR XNS XPF XPS NONE <--
The system displays NONE only if there are multiple hosts available and no host has been selected, or if a system error has occurred, causing the system to deselect all hosts.
HIP SHOW HOSTS Syntax
HIP SHOW JOBS or HIP JOBS
Displays the current state of the HIP task and a selected list of jobs in the internal queues. You can use HIP JOBS and HIP
SHOW JOBS interchangeably. The operator control console has about 20 lines available for displaying job status information on the screen. There are three formats for display information: page format, complete format, and summary format, as described in table 1-12.
1-50 XEROX 4050/4090/4450/4650 LPS COMMAND REFERENCE
SYSTEM COMMANDS
Table 1-12.
Display information
Syntax
Parameter options
Format Description
Page display The page display format displays up to 6 pages. Each page contains up to 20 jobs ordered from the oldest completed job to the newest job received. PAGE 1 contains jobs 1 through 20; PAGE 2 contains jobs 21 through 40, and so forth.
If there are fewer than 20 jobs in the HIP queue, the entire queue displays. If there are fewer than 20 jobs in the page requested, jobs display from the previous page for a full screen of 20 jobs. If there are fewer than 19 jobs after the completed job, additional completed jobs appear in the display.
Complete display
The complete display format displays up to
20 lines of jobs status information and a message to indicate the end of the display.
If there are fewer than 20 jobs in the selected state, all of them display. If there are more than 20 jobs in the selected state, use the HIP SHOW JOBS CONTINUE command to continue the display.
Summary display The summary display format displays up to
20 lines of job status information and a message to indicate the end of the display.
If there are fewer than 20 jobs to display, a normal job queue display is given. If there are more than 20 jobs in the queues, the number of additional jobs is specified.
HIP SHOW JOBS type or HIP JOBS type type
ABORTED
Specifies all jobs aborted with the HIP ABORT command.
ACTIVE
Specifies jobs in the active state: QUEUED, ACTIVE,
OQUEUED, and PRINTING.
ALL
Specifies all jobs in the queues.
CANCELED
Specifies all jobs canceled by a host restart.
COMPLETED
Specifies jobs in the completed state: PRINTED,
STORED, SENT, ABORTED, and REJECTED.
CONTINUE
Continues a previously requested display if all jobs in the queue were not displayed.
XEROX 4050/4090/4450/4650 LPS COMMAND REFERENCE 1-51
SYSTEM COMMANDS
1-52
Default
Example1
Example 2
PAGE n
Specifies a full screen of job information. n is a number from 1 to 6 specifying the number of pages. If you do not specify n or if n=0, the default is the 20 jobs starting with the last COMPLETED job.
PENDING
Specifies all jobs waiting to be sent from the host
(PENDING and RECEIVING).
PRINTED
Specifies all jobs in the printed state (PRINTED and
TRUNCATED).
SUMMARY
Specifies the summary display format.
SUMMARY is the default.
Figure 1-3 shows a sample of the complete display format.
Figure 1-3.
HIP SHOW JOBS complete display
HOST:hst:linemode
JID# HOSTNAME nnnn hostname
HIP:runmode
RECEIVED hh:mm:ss
HP1110 END OF JOB DISPLAY
FILEMODE:filemode
STATUS status
JOB#
0000
TIME hh:mm:ss
Figure 1-4 shows a sample of the summary display format.
Figure 1-4.
Summary display
HOST:hst:linemode
.
.
.
.
...
.
.
.
.
JID# HOST NAME nnnn<host name>
.
.
.
.
.
.
...
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
HIP:runmode FILEMODE:
.
.
.
RECEIVED hh:mm:ss
.
STATUS
COMPLETED
COMPLETED
COMPLETED
COMPLETED
STORED
.
.
.
.
and n more COMPLETED jobs.
.
PRINTING
QUEUED
QUEUED
QUEUED
QUEUED
.
QUEUED and n more OQUEUED jobs.
.
ACTIVE
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
PENDING
PENDING
PENDING
PENDING
PENDING
...
.
.
HP1110 END OF JOB DISPLAY and n more PENDING jobs.
.
RECEIVE
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
filemode
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
JOB#
0000
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
TIME hh:mm:ss
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
XEROX 4050/4090/4450/4650 LPS COMMAND REFERENCE
SYSTEM COMMANDS
The parameter options shown in figure 1-4 are listed and described in table 1-13.
Table 1-13.
Summary display format parameter options
Parameter hst linemode runmode filemode nnnn hostname
0000 hh:mm:ss
Considerations
Syntax
Description
Specifies one of the possible hosts (871, XNS, DEC, or XPF).
Specifies the status of the host interface (OFFLINE, ONLINE,
PEND, READY, RECEIVING, SENDING, or SUSPENDED).
Specifies the run mode of the job (STARTED, STOPPED, or
DUMP).
Specifies the acceptable file types (ALL JOBS or PRINT JOBS).
Specifies the internal job identification number (JID) for HIP.
Indicates the host name on the file label. An asterisk (*) following this name indicates that the job is an 871 job received from the punch port. Refer to the Xerox 871 Communication
Module System Guide for a description of the punch port.
Specifies the job number (JN) assigned by OCS when the job is submitted for printing. It is 0000 for non-print and pending jobs.
Specifies the time a job was received and when its status was last changed.
A maximum of five lines list jobs in the COMPLETED state, eight lines list jobs in the ACTIVE state, and seven lines list the jobs in
PENDING state.
Depending on the state of the HIP XNS services and job queue,
HIP may defer the processing of OFFLINE and END commands.
If HIP is communicating with a networked workstation when HIP
OFFLINE is entered, processing is deferred until the workstation session terminates, either through initiation by the workstation or through timeout. If deferred, HIP displays the message
HP1200
OFFLINE PENDING END OF CURRENT ACTIVE XNS SESSION
. When the session concludes and the Ethernet is brought offline, HIP displays the message
HP1230 HOST OFFLINE
.
The HIP END command effects an automatic STOP and OFFLINE prior to the task exit. STOP is honored immediately; OFFLINE may be deferred, as described above. Ending of HIP is deferred until the OFFLINE command is processed and, if any jobs are active on the HIP print queue, the END command is further deferred until all active jobs are completed.
HIP honors an END command with jobs on the receive queue in a pending state. When HIP is reloaded, those pending jobs remain in the HIP job queue.
HIP SHOW LOG
Displays the current state of the HIP task and a list of all the log entries. If you do not specify a parameter, the contents of the entire log file displays.
HIP SHOW LOG type
XEROX 4050/4090/4450/4650 LPS COMMAND REFERENCE 1-53
SYSTEM COMMANDS
Parameter type
CONTINUE
Continues a previously requested display if all log entries in the log file were not displayed.
DELETED
Displays all files that have been deleted.
LGF
Displays logged off users of XNS service.
LGN
Displays logged on users of XNS service.
LIST
Displays all folders/files that have been listed.
PAGE n
Displays page n of the log display. If n=0 or is not entered, page 1 is displayed. A page consists of up to 16 log entries.
PRINTED
Displays all jobs in the printed state.
PRN
Prints the contents of the log file.
RETRIEVED
Displays all files that have been retrieved.
STORED
Displays all files that have been stored.
HIP SHOW LOG information is shown in figure 1-5.
Figure 1-5.
HIP SHOW LOG display information host logging
USER ID hst id log status XNSLOG
FILE filename
BEGIN date/time optype
END time
OPERATION opertn
The parameter options shown in figure 1-5 are listed and described in table 1-14.
1-54 XEROX 4050/4090/4450/4650 LPS COMMAND REFERENCE
SYSTEM COMMANDS
Table 1-14.
Hip show log display parameter options
Parameter host linemode optypes hst id filename date/time time opertn
Description
Identifies the current host interface: 871,
DMR, XNS, or XPAF.
Specifies the status of the host interface:
OFFLINE, ONLINE, PEND, READY,
RECEIVING, SENDING, or SUSPENDED.
Specifies the operations configured for logging, including:
• CLOSE—Closes the file.
• CONT—Prevents the file service connection from terminating due to inactivity.
• DELE—Deletes the specified file.
• LIST—Listed files in the specified directory.
• LOGF—Logs off from the filing service.
• LOGN—Logs on to the filing service.
• OPEN—Opens the file.
• PRIN—Prints a job.
• RETR—Retrieves the file.
• STOR—Stores the file.
Specifies the host interface.
Specifies the user name in 1 to 15 characters.
A user ID over 15 characters is truncated.
Specifies the file name as file-name[.file-
type].
Specifies the date and time the operation call is received. The date format is MM/DD/YY.
The time format is HH:MM:SS.
Specifies the time the operation was completed. The time format is HH:MM:SS.
Specifies the operation performed on the file: ALL, CLOSE, CONTINUE, DELETE, LIST,
LOGOFF, LOGON, OPEN, PRINT, RETRIEVE, or STORE.
HIP SHOW VERSION
Syntax
Checks the HIP processing version.
HIP SHOW VERSION
XEROX 4050/4090/4450/4650 LPS COMMAND REFERENCE 1-55
SYSTEM COMMANDS
HIP SJC
HIP SLC
Syntax
Abbreviates the HIP SHOW LOG CONTINUE command which continues the XNS log display.
HIP SLC
HIP START or HIP ONLINE
Syntax
Parameter options
Logon level
Considerations
Starts or restarts processing of jobs in the HIP queue. The XPAF host may submit jobs in a pass through mode, where the job passes directly to the LPS processing. Although HIP is not involved in receiving the job, you must start HIP in order for pass through jobs to be processed. If a message appears indicating that a pass through job is pending, enter the HIP START command. While the pass through job is processing, HIP is in a suspended state. After the pass through job has finished, HIP returns to the start state.
HIP START DUMP job-id,...
DUMP
If you specify this parameter, the system processes the next job in the queue (or the job specified in the command string if you have specified one) using the START command parameters defined in the DUMPJOB= field of the HIP.LIB
file. Only one job is submitted (either the first job in the queue or the first job id specified in the command string).
After the specified job is processed, HIP issues a STOP command.
job-id
Use this parameter to start only specified jobs within the HIP queue. After HIP has submitted the last job in the job-id list,
HIP issues a STOP command.
The logon levels are 1 through 5.
When you enter the HIP START command with no parameters,
HIP submits all jobs in the queue in the order received (or the order set in any previous HIP START commands).
HIP STOP
Syntax
Abbreviates the HIP SHOW JOBS CONTINUE command which continues the HIP job status display.
HIP SJC
Syntax
Stops submitting HIP jobs to print processing. Jobs already being prepared for printing or being printed complete processing.
If the operator enters the OSS RESET command, the system automatically executes HIP STOP and also aborts all HIP jobs
(jobs being transmitted and all QUEUED, ACTIVE, OQUEUED, and PRINTING jobs).
HIP STOP
1-56 XEROX 4050/4090/4450/4650 LPS COMMAND REFERENCE
Considerations
Syntax
SYSTEM COMMANDS
If the LPS is online, HIP continues to receive jobs until the storage space for the LPS HIP queue is filled.
HOSTCOPY
Accepts files transmitted from the host computer and stores them on the LPS disk on online systems. Files in two different formats may be transmitted: user-created card-image files, and
LPS-labeled files (such as font, logo, and patch tapes). Files loaded onto the system using the HOSTCOPY command must be retrieved by the editor MERGE command prior to editing to insert valid sequence numbers.
Certain destination file types are not accepted for either LPSlabeled or card-image files. These are file types OSD, SAF, SYS,
$Y$, and TSK. In addition, card-image format files are restricted to destination file types CMD, FSL, JSL, MSC, PCH, TMP, and
TPF.
HOSTCOPY
Card-image format files. Files may be transmitted to the LPS in
80-character EBCDIC records. A group of records stored as a data file is called a packet. Each packet must be preceded by a control record which specifies the name of the file. This control record has the following format, starting in column 1:
$$$START file-name.file-type where file-name is a 2 to 6 character name and file-type is one of the valid file type designations listed previously. Either a period or a comma is acceptable as the separator between the file name and the file type.
One or more EBCDIC packets may be transmitted at one time.
Each packet should be preceded by the $$$START record. After the last packet, the transmission must be ended by another control record. The format for this record, starting in column 1 is:
$$$END
Each packet transmitted may not exceed 3072 records.
Exceeding this limit truncates the file to 3072 records.
If any of the above errors are encountered, the file is not created on the disk, and you are given the opportunity to continue or abort HOSTCOPY. Any file names greater than six characters are truncated to six characters. If a $$$START record is immediately followed by a $$$END record, the following message is displayed:
FILE SIZE EQUALS ZERO
The file is not created on the disk, and you are given the opportunity to continue or abort HOSTCOPY.
If any problem is found with the $$$START record, one of the messages shown in figure 1-6 is displayed with the $$$START record displayed on the next line.
XEROX 4050/4090/4450/4650 LPS COMMAND REFERENCE 1-57
SYSTEM COMMANDS
//LOADXERX
//SYSPRINT
//SYSIN
//SYSUT2
//SYSUT1
//
Logon level
Example
Figure 1-6.
Invalid file type messages
INVALID FILE TYPE
INVALID CHARACTER IN FILE NAME OR FILE TYPE
MISSING "." OR "," IN $$$START RECORD
Font and logo tape file format. Font and logo tapes are LPSlabeled tapes issued by Xerox. They have been structured for use with online and offline systems. The last physical file on these tapes is a concatenation of all previous files on the tape.
This last file is in a format that can be transmitted across the host
I/O channel to the printing system. A host utility must be used to advance the tape to the beginning of the last file. Font and logo files have 128-byte blocks, followed by blocks of multiples of 512 bytes, from 512 bytes to 8192 bytes. The files must be deblocked to 128-byte records before transmission to the LPS.
Some operating systems may require that an FCB and UCSB be transmitted with the job. These are accepted, but they are ignored by HOSTCOPY.
The program (for example, IEBGENER) that transmits files to the
LPS must not add page numbers or reformat the data. In particular, no additional records may be added between the files.
The logon level is 1.
Figure 1-7 is a sample JCL using the IEBGENER host utility to send a concatenated file to the LPS. In the example, 01E is the device address of the printing system. For illustration purposes, the tape to be transmitted contains 246 individual system files.
Appended to these 246 files are a dummy ENDFIL file and a concatenated file containing the preceding 247 files. Thus, the first parameter after the LABEL= is the file number of the file to be transmitted (in this case, file number 248).
Figure 1-7.
Sample JCL
EXEC
DD
DD
DD
DD
PGM=IEBGENER,REGION=80K
SYSOUT=A
DUMMY
UNIT=01E,DCB=(RECFM=FB,LRECL=128,BLKSIZE=128)
UNIT=TAPE,DCB=(RECFM=FB,LRECL=128,BLKSIZE=8192),DSN=XEROX,
DISP=OLD,LABEL=(248,NL,EXPDT=98000),VOL=SER=XEROXO
If EBCDIC files are transmitted, the final
CREATING FILE xxxxxx.yyy
message is displayed after response to the message
END OF TAPE FOUND
.
IS ANOTHER TAPE TO BE SENT? Y or N
.
IFU
1-58
Invokes the IFU. This allows you to create fonts from a Font
Interchange Standard (FIS) Interpress master suitable for print jobs in an Interpress or data center environment.
You communicate with the IFU using the keyboard or display.
You can key in one or more IFU commands in the command line and then enter IFU to execute them all; or you can invoke IFU first, then enter each IFU command.
XEROX 4050/4090/4450/4650 LPS COMMAND REFERENCE
SYSTEM COMMANDS
The FIS defines a digital representation for the interchange of fonts and character metrics between you and the LPS. FIS uses
Interpress to describe fonts independently of any particular printing or imaging system.
The LPS supports fonts encoded in FIS on a Xerox-labeled 1600 or 6250 bpi magnetic tape or other delivery media. An FIS master is an Interpress master defined and encoded according to the Font Interchange Standard provided on tape. FIS allows you to generate an entire series of Interpress fonts suitable for reference in an Interpress master, or to generate standard data center fonts.
You can invoke IFU when the LPS is idle and is a co-process with the Interpress decomposer (IPD) for processing FIS Interpress font masters. You have the ability to generate and manage fonts which correspond to the Interpress font names with various point sizes and orientations containing selected characters from an FIS
Interpress font master. IFU provides the following functional features:
• Reads FIS font master from an FIS delivery medium (magnetic tape, etc.) for the creation of LPS font files, or, at your discretion, Xerox LPS font files for the data center environment.
• Performs traditional file management functions on Interpress font files resident on the system, including addition, duplication (from disk to or from tape and disk to or from floppy), deletion, and listing by Interpress font name.s
• Changes the substitution priority for a particular Interpress font.
• Compiles old IPFNTS.JSL source mapping files to new LPS
Interpress linked structures.
• Compresses LPS Interpress mapping to enhance font management performance and delete unreferenced
Interpress font files.
• Prints a sample statistics page of a generated font.
• Compiles font profile by section.
• Produces rendered or composite character bitmaps from an
FIS font master in support of data center applications, which require accented characters and improved performance for
Interpress fonts.
You can invoke IFU in single command mode only. IFU accepts any single command, executes it, and returns to the system prompt:
OS1000 READY FOR COMMANDS.
Then you can enter another single command.
You can specify an Interpress font by its font family or its font name characteristics:
• An Interpress font family name is a three-part name composed of a naming authority, character code, and typeface name.
• An Interpress font name is a six-part name composed of a naming authority, character code, typeface name, point size, orientation, and resolution.
XEROX 4050/4090/4450/4650 LPS COMMAND REFERENCE 1-59
SYSTEM COMMANDS
1-60
Syntax
Logon level
Syntax
Parameter options
If you specify only the Interpress font family name, all the font families (such as orientations, point sizes, and resolutions) are processed as if they were wild carded. You can insert a wild card (*) in place of any family name component, except in DEFAULT and SUBSTITUTION commands which require a single Interpress font family name.
Variable information in the IFU command information below is shown in italics, for example, name. The correct syntax for entering an Interpress font is:
'XEROX','XC82-0-0','HELVETICA' or
'XEROX XC82-0-0 HELVETICA 12 P 300’
Font name length will make some IFU commands longer than 78 characters. Enter these commands using the IFU mode. For each long command, enter IFU and press <ENTER>, then enter the IFU command.
IFU COMPRESS
Removes unused space from the mapping tables in IPFNTS.SYS, deletes unreferenced font files, and consolidates fragmented
.IPM files.
IFU COMPRESS
The logon levels are 1 through 5.
IFU COPY
Copies printer font files and their associated mappings from the
LPS internal disk storage to and from external media. This allows easy backup and transport of Interpress fonts.
IFU COPY medium keyword Interpress font name medium
TAPE
Specifies the device assigned to the TAPE keyword using
SUB DEV. TAPE is the default keyword.
FLOPPY
Specifies the device as floppy.
CARTRIDGE
Specifies the device assigned to the CAR keyword using the SUB DEV command.
keyword
READ
Searches for the Interpress font name matching the specified Interpress font mask. If a match is found, copies the font files and their mappings from the file on the tape or cartridge and replaces or creates the font files in the FNT directory.
WRITE
Copies .FNT font files and the associated Interpress font mappings to the external medium as a single virtual file.
Supports multiple volume tapes and cartridges. When the virtual file being written reaches end of volume, you are prompted for the next volume. Always appends to the end of the logical volume.
XEROX 4050/4090/4450/4650 LPS COMMAND REFERENCE
Default
Considerations
Syntax
Parameter options
Considerations
Syntax
Parameter
Default
Considerations
SYSTEM COMMANDS
Interpress font name
Specifies the font files to be copied.
READ is the default keyword.
Although OSS supports multiple volume writes, the editor and
IFU tasks do not support them. Do not issue a multiple volume write from EDI or from IFU. It may fail and corrupt the volume by jeopardizing the volume file integrity, and the Interpress file and font integrity. Avoid this problem by writing files to a single volume and selectively including files or font families.
If an Interpress font family is copied to tape, floppy, or cartridge, and then read back, the corresponding LPS font files are assigned new names. Since the comparable Interpress font names map to the same LPS font files, do not copy one Interpress font family without its comparable names. If you do so, and then copy it back to the same LPS, the LPS creates duplicate fonts on the system. The duplicate fonts do not affect the Interpress mapping structure, but they do increase the amount of disk storage space used.
For the IFU COPY FLOPPY WRITE command, only one write may be performed per floppy. Appending writes on floppy disks is not allowed.
IFU DEFAULT
Establishes the Interpress master font family default used to print an Interpress master which does not specify a font name. This name can also be set when the IPFNTS command is used to compile the Interpress fonts .JSL file.
IFU DEFAULT Interpress font family name
Interpress font family name
Specifies the font files to be used as the default.
IFU does not check the validity of the default font name. An unrecognized font name generates the Interpress error message:
Master Error (page n): Font problem; font "<font name>" unknown
.
If the font name is too long, the printed message is truncated.
IFU DELETE
Deletes the LPS files associated with an Interpress font, or with a family of Interpress fonts.
IFU DELETE Interpress font name
Interpress font name
Specifies the font file or files to be deleted. If you use masking, you are prompted for confirmation.
The default response is N.
The system font files associated with deleted fonts are not deleted, since they can be referenced by other mappings. You must use the COMPRESS command to delete font files which are no longer referenced by any Interpress font file.
XEROX 4050/4090/4450/4650 LPS COMMAND REFERENCE 1-61
SYSTEM COMMANDS
1-62
Syntax
Syntax
Parameter options
Default
Syntax
Parameter options
Default
Considerations
Syntax
IFU FDR
Recreates the font directory file after upgrading the operating system, if the font directory is corrupted. This process can take up to 30 minutes.
IFU FDR
IFU FILE
Reviews on screen the names and characteristics of the Interpress fonts that have been written to the medium.
IFU medium or IFU disk
FILE
FILE/EX Interpress font name medium
FLOPPY
Specifies the device as floppy.
CARTRIDGE
Specifies the device assigned to the CAR keyword using the SUB DEV command.
TAPE
Specifies the device assigned to the TAPE keyword using the SUB DEV command.
disk
Specifies the disk as DP0:, DP1:, DP2: or DP3:.
Interpress font name
Specifies the font file or files to display. (If you use masking, you are prompted for confirmation. The default response is
N.)
The default is TAPE.
IFU IPFNTS
Compiles the mapping information in the Interpress fonts JSL file into the Interpress font environment. The Interpress font environment is not replaced completely by this command; information in the input file is merely added to the Interpress font environment.
IFU IPFNTS keyword .JSL
keyword
Interpress font name or IPFNTS.
If you do not specify a name, IPFNTS.JSL is the input file.
Compiling Interpress fonts .JSL files with large FONTS statements might exceed the IFU IPFNTS limit.
IFU LIST
Prints 1 to 674 duplex pages reporting the names and characteristics of Interpress fonts that have been written to the tape, cartridge, or floppy disk.
IFU medium LIST or IFU disk LIST/EX Interpress font name
XEROX 4050/4090/4450/4650 LPS COMMAND REFERENCE
Parameter options
Considerations
Syntax
Parameter options
Logon level
Default
Syntax
Logon level
SYSTEM COMMANDS medium
TAPE
Specifies the device assigned to the TAPE keyword using the SUB DEV command. TAPE is the default keyword.
FLOPPY
Specifies the device as floppy disk.
CARTRIDGE
Specifies the device assigned to the CAR keyword using the SUB DEV command.
disk
Specifies the disk as DP0:, DP1:, DP2: or DP3:.
Interpress font name
Specifies the font file or files to be deleted. (If you use masking, you are prompted for confirmation. The default response is N.)
If more than 674 pages will be generated, the system displays a warning message before executing the command. You must then enter multiple IFU LIST commands to generate a complete list.
IFU MOVE
Positions a tape or cartridge a specified number of files forward or backward before issuing an IFU COPY READ, LIST, or FILE command.
IFU medium MOVE n FILES medium
TAPE
Specifies the device assigned to the TAPE keyword using the SUB DEV command. Tape is the default.
CARTRIDGE
Specifies the device assigned to the CAR keyword using the SUB DEV command.
n
Specifies a decimal value within -32768 and 32767, inclusive.
If n is positive, the tape or cartridge advances forward. If n is negative, the tape or cartridge rewinds.
The logon levels are 1 through 5.
The default value is 1.
IFU PRINTER
Establishes the name of the LPS printer in the IPFNTS.SYS file.
IFU PRINTER printer-name
The logon levels are 1 through 5.
XEROX 4050/4090/4450/4650 LPS COMMAND REFERENCE 1-63
SYSTEM COMMANDS
Syntax
Parameter options
Logon level
Default
Syntax
Parameter options
Logon level
Default
Syntax
Parameter options
Default
Syntax
IFU SUBSTITUTION
Changes the substitution criteria for a single font family.
Substitution criteria are used when an Interpress master calls for a font which is not available on the printer. The criteria are used by the imaging software to determine which font to substitute for the desired font.
IFU SUBSTITUTION interpress font name,substitution-priority interpress font name
Specifies the Interpress font name.
substitution priority
Must be NORMAL or NOPOINTSIZE.
The logon levels are 1 through 5.
The default is NORMAL.
IFU REWIND
Rewinds the tape or cartridge to the beginning.
IFU medium REWIND medium
TAPE
Specifies the device assigned to the TAPE keyword using
SUB DEV. TAPE is the default keyword.
CARTRIDGE
Specifies the device assigned to the CAR keyword using
SUB.
The logon levels are 1 through 5.
TAPE
IFU UNLOAD
Unloads the tape or cartridge from the drive.
IFU medium UNLOAD medium
TAPE
Specifies the device assigned to the TAPE keyword using
SUB DEV. TAPE is the default keyword.
CARTRIDGE
Specifies the device assigned to the CAR keyword using
SUB DEV.
The default is TAPE.
IFU VOLINIT
Initializes the tape or cartridge in preparation for an IFU COPY
WRITE command.
IFU medium VOLINIT value
1-64 XEROX 4050/4090/4450/4650 LPS COMMAND REFERENCE
SYSTEM COMMANDS
Parameter options
Default
Logon level medium
TAPE
Specifies the device assigned to the TAPE keyword.
CARTRIDGE
Specifies the device assigned to the CAR keyword using
SUB DEV.
value
1600
1600 bpi
6250
The medium default is TAPE.
The logon levels are 1 through 5.
Syntax
Parameter options
Considerations
IFU SAMPLE
Prints sample pages for a single Interpress font.
IFU SAMPLE Interpress font name
Interpress font name
Specifies the font name to be sampled.
Do not use the IFU SAMPLE command within a system or editor command file.
IMAGE
Displays, fixes, or prints the content of .IMG files in compressed and decompressed format. You can fix the format of known bad
.IMG files which may cause the following types of problems:
• Vertically or horizontally truncated images
• Trailing vertical or horizontal image strips from previous image print.
If you cannot print the image using the SAMPLE command, you may not be able to fix it. After you fix an image file, this command updates the following information:
• Compressed vector length in header and trailer
• x pixel value
• Total number of scan lines in the image
• Converts Interpress 1.0 to Interpress 2.0 format.
This command supports Interpress 1.0 and 2.0 formats, and RES format image files.
Syntax IMAGE
[/EXPAND|/VERBOSE|/STATISTICS|/ALL [(scanline start, scanline
end)]]
Logon level The logon levels are 1 through 5.
Parameters DUMP
Displays the content of the .IMG files you specify.
Prints the content of the .IMG files you specify.
FIX
Fixes the damaged .IMG files that you specify.
XEROX 4050/4090/4450/4650 LPS COMMAND REFERENCE 1-65
SYSTEM COMMANDS filename
Specifies one or more files. You can enter up to six characters. The filename can include wildcards (* and ?).
file-type
Specifies the file type as .IMG.
/EXPAND
Displays or prints a compressed scan line followed by a decompressed scan line. This parameter is used only for
PRINT and DUMP.
/VERBOSE
Displays or prints a detailed diagnostic message before and after the compressed image data. The information in the image header and trailer displays in decimal value. A diagnostic message does not display for RES format files.
/STATISTICS
Displays or prints the following statistics:
• Scan line length
• Total number of scan lines in the image file
• Total number of ENC, HTN, LIN, and RAW scan lines
• Total number of EOI encountered
• Total number of bad nibbles
• Total number of bad scan lines
• x pixel value
• y pixel value
• Image file size (in bytes)
• Actual compressed vector length
• Compressed vector length in header and trailer.
/ALL
Fixes Interpress 1.0 and 2.0 image files, but skips RES image files. If you do not specify this parameter, the command fixes only Interpress 1.0 image files and skips all other .IMG
files. This parameter is used only for FIX.
scanline start, scanline end
Specifies a range to display or print the image data. You must separate scanline start and scanline end with a comma
(,) and enclose them inside parenthesis, as shown in the syntax. This parameter is used only for PRINT and DUMP.
INITIALIZE QUEUE
Syntax
Logon level
Parameters
Erases the existing print queue database, creates a new print queue database, sets its size and its warning and frequency flags, and initializes it.
Warning flags indicate that the beginning of the file is about to be overwritten. Frequency flags determine how often warning messages are displayed.
INITIALIZE QUEUE [nnnn] [NOF|OWF|DWF|NWF:n.m]
The logon levels are 2 through 5.
nnnn
Specifies the number of entries in the queue. You can specify a value in the range of 200 to 2000. If the queue file does not exist and you do not specify a value, a report queue of 400 entries is created.
1-66 XEROX 4050/4090/4450/4650 LPS COMMAND REFERENCE
Example
Recommendation
Restriction
Logon level
Syntax
Parameters
SYSTEM COMMANDS
NOF
Deactivates the warning and frequency flags. No warnings are displayed.
OWF
Activates previous (old) warning and frequency flags and preserves previous flag settings.
DWF
Activates the default warning flag (40) and frequency flag (3).
NWF:n.m
Sets and activates new warning and frequency flags. The n value indicates the threshold at which warnings begin. The
m value indicates the frequency at which warning messages display to the operator.
If n=25 and m=3, warnings are displayed when 25, 22, 19, 16, etc., entries can be made before the end of the print queue database is reached.
Back up the existing print queue database before issuing
INITIALIZE QUEUE.
INITIALIZE QUEUE executes only when the queue is empty.
JOBS
Use this command or press <JOBS STATUS> to display the status of the system and the documents in the print queue.
There will be a delay for a few seconds to process the information. The last item printed appears first in the display.
The JOBS command allows you to temporarily change the format of the information that displays. The SET QUEUE DISPLAY command controls the default display format and allows you to set the format permanently.
The logon levels are 1 through 5.
JOBS [ALL|QUEUE|#entry-string|n|report-attribute]
[CLASSIC|BRIEF|FULL]
ALL
Displays information on all documents in the queue with
Queued, Input, IAbort, OAbort, UAbort, Held, Active,
In/prntg, or Printing status. Also displays status of the last
100 documents printed.
QUEUE
Displays information on all documents (entries) in the queue with Held, Queued, Active, or Printing status, and the status of the last 100 documents printed. May be abbreviated as
JOBS Q.
#entry-string
Displays information on specified entries in the queue. You specify these using the #n, #n-m, or #(n-m,o,p-r) format.
#n
Specifies a single entry. n must be an integer between 1 and 65535.
#n-m
Specifies one set of multiple entries. n and m must be integers between 1 and 65535. All entries between n and m, inclusive, are passed to output.
XEROX 4050/4090/4450/4650 LPS COMMAND REFERENCE 1-67
SYSTEM COMMANDS
1-68
#(n-m,o,p-r)
Specifies multiple sets of entries. Values must be integers between 1 and 65535. All entries n through m inclusive, o, and p through r, inclusive, are passed to output. Parenthesis are required around the string.
Commas without spaces are required between string elements.
n
Displays status information for all reports queued for output, plus the status of up to n completed reports, where n is 100 or less.
report-attribute
Displays entries which use the following specified resources:
PRIMARY COLOR
Displays information for all entries that require the specified primary color.
STITCH
Displays information for all entries that require stapling.
ACTIVE
Displays information for all entries that are in the active queue.
HELD
Displays information for all entries that are in a held queue.
QUEUED
Displays information for all queued entries. Do not confuse this parameter with JOBS QUEUE or JOBS Q.
CLUSTERS=xxx
Displays information for all entries that require the specified cluster.
You can specify up to three resources as follows:
AND l &
Displays entries that use all the resources specified, for example:
• RED & GREEN & BLUE
• GREEN AND BLUE AND HELD
OR l !
Displays entries that use only one of the resources specified, for example:
• RED ! GREEN
• GREEN OR ACTIVE
NOT l -
Displays entries that do not use the resource that follows, for example:
• NOT RED
• - STITCH
You can use parentheses to indicate the resources that have the highest priority, otherwise, the order of priority is from left to right.
CLASSIC
Displays information in the CLASSIC format. Refer to the
“Examples” section for a sample of the CLASSIC format.
XEROX 4050/4090/4450/4650 LPS COMMAND REFERENCE
SYSTEM COMMANDS
Examples
BRIEF
Displays information in the BRIEF format. Refer to the
“Examples” section for a sample of the BRIEF format. This is the default.
FULL
Displays information in the FULL format. Refer to the
“Examples” section for a sample of the FULL format.
Figures 1-8 through 1-11 are examples of the job status display.
Figure 1-8.
System and print queue status display
Queue status mm/dd/yy hh:mm:ss
Queue Manager is stopped
Queue Manager is stopped
Queue Manager is active
Queue Manager is active
System is idle
System is ON-LINE
System is OFF-LINE schedule mode is resource schedule mode is received schedule mode is resource schedule mode is received
Input is stopped
Output is stopped -- printer fault
Output is stopped -- otext wait
Stitch off active
Stitch on active
Job queue is empty
Jobs held in queue
JOB ID xxxx JDE xxxxxx queued for INPUT
Approximately xxxx unused entries in the queue
If you select the CLASSIC format, the following information displays after the system and print queue status information.
Figure 1-9.
CLASSIC format status display
Job
#
Cust
Job #
Rpt
#
Report
Name JDE/JDL xxxx xxxxxx xxxx xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxxxx/xxxxxx
Copy Total
Count Pages
Pages
Prntd
Status
Msg xxxx xxxxxx xxxxxx xxxxxxxx
Msg# xxxx
If you select the BRIEF format, the following information displays after the system and print queue status information.
Figure 1-10.
BRIEF format status display
Entry
# xxxxx
Cust
ID xxxxxx
Report
Name xxxxxxxxxxxxxx
Job
# xxxxx
Copy
Count xxxxxx
Total
Pages xxxxxxx
Pages
Printd xxxxxx
Color JDE/JDL Status xxxx xxxxxx/xxxxxx xxxxxxxx
If you select the FULL format, the following information displays after the system and print queue status information.
Figure 1-11.
FULL format status display
Entry
# xxxx
Cust Report Job Rpt Copy Total Pages
ID Name # # Count Pages Printd JDE/JDL Status xxxxxx xxxxxxxxxxxx xxxxx xxxx xxxxxx xxxxxxx xxxxxx xxxxxx/xxxxxx xxxxxxxx
Colors xxx,xxx,xxx,xxx,xxx
Sti x
Clusters xxxxxx,xxxxxx,xxxxxx,xxxxxx,xxxxxx
SMsg# xxxx
XEROX 4050/4090/4450/4650 LPS COMMAND REFERENCE 1-69
SYSTEM COMMANDS
Display descriptions *
An asterisk preceding a report attribute indicates that this attribute is causing the report to be held in the queue.
+
A plus symbol in the Color or Colors column indicates that the report uses multiple colors.
-
A hyphen symbol indicates the absence of color, clusters, or a status message.
Job #
The job identification number supplied by the system.
Entry #
The entry assigned by the Queue Manager that identifies an entry in the report queue. Queue Manager commands with the entry string parameter use this number when applicable.
Cust Job# or Cust ID
Specifies one of the following:
• Host job number, as defined by the user with the
HJOBNO command of the BANNER statement in an online job
• FILE ID (same as on the accounting page) if in an offline job
• User ID for Ethernet from the PRINT request
• Blank, if the information is not available.
Rpt #
The report number, as currently defined on the accounting page. The position within the job. A report number of zero indicates that the job containing the report was terminated before the first report was processed.
Report Name
The report name as defined by the online user with the
BANNER statement command, HRPTNA; or by the offline user with the RSTACK statement command, HRPTNA; or with the DISC keyword in the START command. The BRIEF and
FULL formats display the first 12 characters of the report name; CLASSIC displays the first 16 characters.
JDE/JDL
The JDE/JDL name keyed in to start the report, or the DJDE
JDE/JDL encountered.
Copy Count
The maximum number of copies if the report is in input, queued for output, or completed. If the report is in output,
COPY COUNT is the number of copies remaining to print.
COPY COUNT can differ from the copy count in the JSL due to the application of a DJDE.
Total Pages
The current number of pages written to disk if the report is in input. If the report is printing or queued for output, TOTAL
PAGES is the total number of pages in the report.
Pages Prntd
The number of pages completed if printing. Otherwise, this value is zero.
1-70 XEROX 4050/4090/4450/4650 LPS COMMAND REFERENCE
SYSTEM COMMANDS
Note: Even though the TOTAL PAGES and PAGES PRNTD fields display only a six-digit number on the screen, the status file maintains the correct page values.
Color or Colors
Displays the first three characters of the first color used in the report. Black is an assumed primary and never displays.
Status
Displays the state of the report as one of the following:
IAbort
INPUT aborted the report or job.
OAbort
OUTPUT aborted the report.
UAbort
User aborted the report or job.
Active
OUTPUT received the report but print has not been issued. When the printer stops, all active entries display a stopped status until printing resumes.
Stopped
The user stopped the report by pressing <STOP> or by entering the STOP command, or an internal problem occurred.
Done
Printing is complete.
Input
The report is being prepared for printing and has not begun to print.
Queued
The report has been prepared for printing and is waiting to print.
Held
The entry cannot be sent to OUTPUT for printing. An asterisk (*) indicates the resource preventing it from printing.
In/prntg
The report is being prepared for printing and part of it is printing.
Printing
The report has been prepared for printing and is printing.
Reset
The report was aborted by the RESET command.
Rcvyn/s
The operator did not request recovery on rollover.
Sti
Indicates if the report requires stitching.
Clusters
Indicates the required clusters, if any.
SMsg#
Displays one of the following:
• The completion code on the accounting page (blank if completion is normal)
XEROX 4050/4090/4450/4650 LPS COMMAND REFERENCE 1-71
SYSTEM COMMANDS
LIST
1-72
• The error message number if the report aborted
• CS displays while the report is processing if the report is copy-sensitive.
Syntax
Parameter options
Logon level
Default
Prints the list of all files on the disk. You can list specific file ids within the catalog or the entire catalog and deliver them to the sample tray. The output page of the LIST command has a header line at the top of each page containing the page number, date, time, and disk id.
In LPS-labeled tapes issued by Xerox and user-created concatenated files, a physical file containing multiple concatenated logical files is identified by the name of the first logical file.
LIST /EX disk-id,file-id,...
or
LIST or
/EX disk-id,file-id,/SORT,file-name.file-type
LIST string
/EX disk-id,file-id,/FILE-NAME.file-type,leading string,trailing
/EX
Prints all the file characteristics of a given file id. If you specify /EX, you cannot specify the leading and trailing strings. If you do not specify /EX, only the file ids print.
disk-id
Identifies which system disk (DP0:, DP1:, DP2:, or DP3:) contains the file ids to be printed.
file-id
Specifies the file as file-name.file-type. If omitted, the default prints the names of all the .TMP files in each directory. (Masking can be used.)
/SORT
Alphabetically sorts a list of up to 3600 file names by type.
When this limit is reached, the message
FILE/LIST TOO LONG,
ONLY FIRST 3600 FILENAMES WILL BE SORTED
. is displayed.
Sorting should be done by file types for large disk or tape volumes.
leading string
A character string without commas that is appended prior to each file name in the list that is created.
trailing string
A character string without commas appended to each file name in the list that is created. No more than 50 leading and trailing characters may be appended.
/file-name.file-type
Specifies a disk file which contains a record for each file listed in the following order: Lead str file-id Trail str.
file-name.file-type
Specifies a disk file which contains the alphabetically sorted list of tape files.
The logon levels are 1 through 5.
The default .file-type is .TMP.
XEROX 4050/4090/4450/4650 LPS COMMAND REFERENCE
LIST/EX file information
Syntax
Parameter options
Password case
SYSTEM COMMANDS
FILE NAME
A one- to ten-character field indicating the file name file type.
UNIT
The system disk unit number (DP0:, DP1:, DP2:, DP3:) on which the file resides.
FSIZE
A one- to ten-character decimal field indicating the number of blocks allocated to the file.
RSIZE
A one- to six-character decimal field indicating the number of bytes in a record.
FFBY
A one- to six-character decimal field indicating the first free byte in the last block of the file.
EOF
A one- to ten-character decimal field indicating the end-offile block number.
DISK ADDR
A one- to ten-character octal field indicating the starting address of the file on the disk.
LOGON
Logs onto the system at levels 1, 2, 3, 4, or 5, and to change the logon passwords. You can also restrict access to all files with a specified extension for a particular action (editing records, deleting files, or copying files).
Refer to RCU for default access to files and command usage for each logon level.
LOGON value or
LOGON value,password value
Specifies logon level 1, 2, 3, 4, or 5.
password
A one- to fifteen-character string which consists of any characters (including leading, nested, or trailing blanks) on the keyboard. You can change the default passwords.
The default passwords are uppercase. The passwords you create may be uppercase, lowercase, or mixed case. All passwords are case-sensitive: the system recognizes a password only if it is entered correctly in content and case.
XEROX 4050/4090/4450/4650 LPS COMMAND REFERENCE 1-73
SYSTEM COMMANDS
Default passwords
Changes
Change passwords
Table 1-15 shows the default password for each logon level.
Table 1–15.
Logon levels and default passwords
1
2
3
4
5
Logon level Default password
(None)
(None)
(Reserved for Xerox analysts)
(Reserved for Xerox service technician)
SECURITY
The password is not displayed on the screen when you enter it.
The screen remains blank and does not indicate the length of the password.
When you log onto the system using the single-line command format of the LOGON command, be aware that the password is captured in the Data Capture Utility (DCU) log if it is turned on.
For greater security when logging onto the system, enter
LOGON security-level, then wait for the system to prompt you for the password. In this case, the password is not captured on the DCU log.
You must always use a password to access a logon level higher than the current level.
You may not need a password to move from a higher level to a lower level. For example, you can move from level 5 to level 2 without a password.
Since your service representatives can access both logon levels 3 and 4, the service technician can move from level 4 to 3 without entering a password.
You must use a password to move from level 5 to level 3 or 4.
If you change a password during a print job, the change takes effect with the next print job.
MOVE
Syntax
Parameter options
Physically positions a magnetic tape or cartridge by a specified number of files or blocks either forward or backward. You can use MOVE during job processing, but you must stop input first with STOP I due to an error stop. If no job is active, you can enter the command directly.
This command operates on the tape or cartridge device that has been assigned to the TAPE keyword using the SUB DEV command.
MOVE n keyword n
A decimal integer in the range -32768 to +32767. A positive number indicates forward movement, and a negative number indicates backward movement.
1-74 XEROX 4050/4090/4450/4650 LPS COMMAND REFERENCE
Default
Considerations
Syntax
Parameters
SYSTEM COMMANDS keyword
FILES
Indicates positioning by files. A positive number moves the tape forward over the same number of tape marks, unless end-of-volume (EOV) terminates the tape movement. A negative number moves the tape backward over the same number of tape marks, unless
BOT terminates the tape movement. File positioning is the default.
BLOCKS
Indicates positioning by blocks. A positive number moves the tape forward over the same number of interblock tape gaps, unless EOT or a tape mark terminates tape movement. A negative number moves the tape backward over the same number of blocks, unless BOT or a tape mark terminates tape movement.
The default is FILES.
If a job is in process when you invoke MOVE, the system requests a CONTINUE I to resume.
Whenever a tape move is halted by reaching a tape mark, the tape is always positioned at the block one greater than the absolute block number of the tape mark. This is done regardless of the direction of the move.
MOVE BLOCKS is not allowed if ABNORMAL SECURITY=YES is coded in the job descriptor library of the report being processed.
MOVE #
Reorders entries in the queue. This command processes entries from left to right. You can reorder entries that have a queued or held status. Active entries have already been passed to output and you cannot reorder them.
MOVE # entry-string location
1
# entry-string or
MOVE # entry-string location
2 entry-string n
Specifies a single entry. Must be an integer between 1 and 65,535.
n-m
Specifies one set of multiple entries. n and m must be integers between 1 and 65,535. All entries between n and m, inclusive, are passed to output.
(n-m,o,p-r)
Specifies multiple sets of entries. Values must be integers between 1 and 65,535. All entries n to m, inclusive, o, and p to r, inclusive, are passed to output.
Parenthesis are required around the string. Commas without spaces are required between string elements.
location
1
BEFORE
Places the first entry-string before the second entry-
string.
XEROX 4050/4090/4450/4650 LPS COMMAND REFERENCE 1-75
SYSTEM COMMANDS
OCS
OFFLINE
Restrictions
AFTER
Places the first entry-string entries after the second entry-
string.
location
2
TOP
Places the entry-string at the beginning (top) of the active queue.
BOTTOM
Places the entry-string at the end (bottom) of the active queue.
To successfully move an entry in the queue, it must have a status of either queued or held. If you specify multiple entries to be moved, they must all have the same status. For example, all entries must be queued or all held; you cannot intermix them.
Moving an entry in the report queue may not necessarily imply the order that it is scheduled because of its position in the queue. For example:
• If the schedule mode is by resource, moving one or more entries to the TOP of the report queue only ensures that they are scheduled next within the context of their attribute type, such as the primary.
• If the schedule mode is by order received, entries are scheduled based on their position in the queue.
Syntax
Logon level
Verifies the Operating System Software (OSS) version information. The system displays the information shown in figure
1-12.
Figure 1-12.
System version display
System version PV4 2.1;
OCS version VAP4;
Command table version xxxx;
System class 4;
Disk ID xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx
OCS
The logon level is 1.
Syntax
Logon level
Moves the system from the online to offline status. After you enter this command, online input data may not be transmitted to the LPS.
OFFLINE
The logon levels are 1 through 5.
1-76 XEROX 4050/4090/4450/4650 LPS COMMAND REFERENCE
SYSTEM COMMANDS
Syntax
Logon level
Syntax
Logon level
Syntax
Parameter options
Logon level
Syntax
Logon level
ONLINE
Moves the system from offline to online status. The system displays
NOT READY
(such as until a START command is entered, data input is stopped and the host does not transmit).
ONLINE
The logon levels are 1 through 5.
PROBLEM
Logs system problems and generates the six-digit dispatch code requested by the Xerox service representative. Respond to the prompts that display.
PROBLEM
The logon levels are 1 through 5.
PSC
The system automatically executes the Printer Subsystem
Controller (PSC) each time you boot the LPS. PSC initializes the printed wire boards (PWBAs) and loads the software they execute during printing operations. In general, the automatic
PSC at system startup is the only PSC needed. If a board error is displayed by the LPS, you can reinitialize any PWBA except the
Small Computer Serial Interface (SCSI) PWBA after booting the system.
If you do not enter parameters, this command prepares all configured PWBA boards except the SCSI board for LPS operations.
PSC keyword keyword
CSI
Prepares the CSI board for LPS operations.
RIP 0 1 2 3
Prepares the specified RIP boards for LPS operations.
CRIB
Prepares the CRIB board for LPS operations.
SCSI
Displays the current status and firmware level of the SCSI board.
If the download succeeds, no more messages display. If an error occurs, refer to the Xerox 4050/4090/4450/4650 LPS Message
Guide.
The logon levels are 2 through 5.
PSTATUS
Verifies the status of the printer.
PSTATUS
The logon levels are 1 through 5.
XEROX 4050/4090/4450/4650 LPS COMMAND REFERENCE 1-77
SYSTEM COMMANDS
Considerations Expect a delay of a few seconds when you request the status during printing because displaying status information is a lower priority than printing operations. Specifically, responses are delayed until end-of-report processing is reported.
If you invoke this command when the printer is not cycling, tray status displays according to the current feed command. The next page to print is not considered. For example, if the current feed command is a cluster command with mixed tray (paper) sizes, the cluster tray that displays may not be the cluster tray with the correct paper for the currently active job. Tables 1-16 through 1-18 give the status of the paper trays, output trays, and the stitcher. Figure 1-13 shows an example of the printer status display.
Figure 1-13. Example of a printer status display
Paper trays:
Feed Tray 1
Tray 1 8.5x11
IN USE
Tray 2 8.5x11
READY
Xerographic Mode: BLACK
Output trays:
Select: Tray 2
Tray 1 READY
Tray 2 IN USE
Dry Ink Color: BLACK
Attention Light: ENABLED, NOT ILLUMINATED
Blade: ENABLED
Darkness: (Lightest = 1, Darkest = 7)
Black 5
Status display
Ready
In Use
Not Ready
Table 1-16.
Paper trays
Meaning
Tray is in a ready state.
Tray is currently being used.
Tray is in an unusable state.
Size display
Mode display
MAIN
AUTO
AUX tray number cluster name
Any size valid for LPS.
Any mode valid for LPS.
The tray designated MAIN is the feed tray.
Automatic switching between feed trays.
The auxiliary tray is the feed tray.
The specified tray is the feed tray.
The trays assigned to the cluster are the feed trays.
LPS status
Ready
Selected
Busy
Jammed
Broken
Empty n/a n/a n/a n/a n/a n/a
1-78 XEROX 4050/4090/4450/4650 LPS COMMAND REFERENCE
SYSTEM COMMANDS
Status display
AUTO tray number
Ready
Empty Me
Not Ready
Full
In Use
Jammed
Table 1-17.
Output trays
Meaning LPS status
Automatic selection of output tray.
Tray for output specified by operator.
n/a n/a
Output tray can receive sheets. If the printer is in SEL AUTO mode, this tray is selected when the other tray becomes full.
The printing system is in SEL AUTO mode, and the output tray can receive sheets. However, it is not completely empty and is not selected automatically.
Output tray is not ready.
Ready
Empty
Ready
Ready
Broken
Offset
Failure
Full Output tray is completely full. If the tray is selected using SEL n and CONTINUE is pressed, up to 11 sheets are delivered to the tray before the tray full condition causes the LPS to cycle down.
Sheets are currently being delivered to this tray.
Selected
Output tray is jammed.
Jammed
Status display
Ready
Out of Wire
Fault
Low Wire
Table 1-18.
Stitcher
Meaning LPS status
Stitcher is ready to stitch.
Stitcher is ready to stitch but is out of wire.
Able To Stitch
Out Of Wire
Stitcher is not ready to stitch.
Unable To
Stitch
Stitcher is ready to stitch but wire supply is low.
Able To Stitch
Syntax
Parameter options
PURGE
Overwrites a system disk with a meaningless pattern of files. Any deleted file (including sensitive files) may still be accessed by a system-knowledgeable user until the files are overwritten.
PURGE also erases the contents of the print file.
PURGE value value
D
Purges the entire disk including the print file. This is the default.
P
Purges only the print file.
XEROX 4050/4090/4450/4650 LPS COMMAND REFERENCE 1-79
SYSTEM COMMANDS
RCU
Logon level
Default
Considerations
F
Purges the entire disk, excluding the print file.
The logon levels are 1 through 5, and may be restricted with
RCU.
The default is D.
If the system was not rebooted after turning data capture on following the last system generation, the system may hang during
PURGE and require a reboot. Prevent this situation by rebooting the system immediately after turning Data Capture on, or by turning Data Capture off before running PURGE and turning Data
Capture back on when PURGE has completed.
Syntax
Parameter options
Logon level
Considerations
Restricts the use of system commands and tasks (such as PDL,
FDL, OSDS) to the specified logon class. The system commands and task names are restricted by relating them to the classes previously defined in the LOGON command. To use a specific system command, you must be logged on to a class level equal to or greater than the user-defined (or default) restriction level.
RCU command,class command
Specifies the command to be authorized or restricted. Some commands cannot be restricted.
class
Specifies the lowest logon class allowed to use the command. If omitted, the current class level for that command displays.
The logon levels are 2 through 5. They may be restricted to higher logon classes with RCU.
You cannot restrict the use of a command to a level higher than the current logon class.
You cannot change the class level of a command unless you are authorized to use that command.
Table 1-19 shows the classes of file access available.
1-80 XEROX 4050/4090/4450/4650 LPS COMMAND REFERENCE
SYSTEM COMMANDS
Table 1–19. File access classes
Record editing File delete File copy to disk
Function type
CMD
CME
DAT
FIS
FNT
FRM
FSL
IDR
IMG
IPF
IPM
JDL
JSL
LGO
LIB*
$Y$
TMP
TPF
TSK
TST
XCS
LOG
MSC
OSD
PCH
PDE
SAF
STK
SYS
X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X
X X X X
X X
X X X X X X X X X
X X X X X X X X X
X
*Some .LIB files may be edited; others may not be edited.
File secure
1
Logon level
2 3 4 5 1
Logon level
2 3 4 5 1
Logon level
2 3 4 5
X X
X
X
X
X X X X X X X X X X X
X X X X X X X X X X
X X X X
X X X X X X X X X
X X X X X X X X X X
X X X X
X X X X
X X X X
X X X X X X X X X X
X X X X X X X X X X
X X X X X X X X X X
X X X X X X X X X X X X X X
X X X X X X
X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X
X X X
X X X X
X X X X X X X X X X
X X X X X X X X X X
X X X X X X X X X X
X X X X X X X X X X
X X X X X X X X X
X X
X X X X X X X X X
X X X X X X X X X X
X X
X X X X X X X X X X
X X X X
Logon level
5
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
User file
The following terms are used in table 1-19:
Function type
Specifies the file directory where files are cataloged. Each file directory contains a specific type of file (for example, JCL contains job source language files).
Record editing
If you cannot edit records in a file, you cannot use GET or any record editing command.
XEROX 4050/4090/4450/4650 LPS COMMAND REFERENCE 1-81
SYSTEM COMMANDS
File secure
Specifies whether you can limit file access to a logon level 5 user only.
User file
Specifies whether you can back up a file using COPY TAPE
WRITE LABEL ALL and FLOPPY SAVE ALL.
REALLOCATE
Syntax for print file
Print file parameter options
Logon level
Default
Example
Considerations
Sets the size of the print file on the system disk. The print file size should be at least 400 cylinders. The print file is assigned
400 cylinders during system generation, but you may need to increase its size in order to meet your installation requirements.
You can increase or decrease the print file size any time the system is idle.
If you enter a parameter, you do not receive system prompts during the reallocation process. The warning messages which inform you not to disturb the process still display. The size of the current print file is not displayed. The system informs you of the number of cylinders allocated and the number of cylinders actually usable by input and output. The system maintains and updates a permanent record of all unusable cylinders. These unusable cylinders are unavailable until the disk is reformatted during a full system generation. If the print file size is less than
400 cylinders or is too small for the job, the engine cycles up and down. This is not desirable. Refer to the Xerox Operating
System Software Program Description for more information on the print file size.
REALLOCATE cylinder size,file size cylinder size
Specifies the cylinder size for the new print file. If the
cylinder size is larger than the largest print file that REA can make, it makes the largest size print file it can. Must be equal to or greater than the minimum configuration for your system. Must be at least 400.
?
Creates up to the default size for the print file if one does not exist. If a print file already exists, a print file of the same size is created.
!
Creates a default size print file even if one already exists. file size
Creates a file size subject to a minimum or maximum value.
The logon level is 2.
The default (and minimum) size of the raster disk file is the cylinder value, which equals 32,768 sectors.
REALLOCATE ?,0
The REALLOCATE interactive dialogue does not allow you to change the size of the raster file.
Do not interrupt the reallocation process: interruption can make sections of the disk unusable until the next completed reallocation.
1-82 XEROX 4050/4090/4450/4650 LPS COMMAND REFERENCE
Recommendations
SYSTEM COMMANDS
The cylinder size value must be at least 400. A high cylinder size value helps prevent disk saturation.
The cylinder size value must also leave at least 50 cylinders of free space on the disk.
Reallocation may terminate with the message
PRINT FILE TOO
SMALL
. The message indicates that the print file has not been created because there is not enough available space. Correct this problem by compressing the disk (COMPRESS DP1:) and reallocating (REA) again. If these steps do not make REA successful, you must review files on the disk and back them up, delete them from the disk, use PURGE, and rerun COMPRESS and REA.
If n is 0, the current raster file size is deleted, but no new file is created. A value less than the minimum size results in an error message and reallocation does not occur.
Manage cylinders so that the required minimum print file sizes are maintained to assure printing without input or output processing lock-up. REALLOCATE processing enforces the minimum print file sizes shown in table 1-20.
Table 1-20.
Minimum print file sizes
Graphic configuration
10MHz-182MB cylinders
No graphics 65
GVG or GVG-2 425
10MHz-380MB cylinders
65
275
SCSI
All
65
275
REPORT
Generates customer billing reports, system activity reports, and user accounting reports. All reports include the information shown in table 1-21.
XEROX 4050/4090/4450/4650 LPS COMMAND REFERENCE 1-83
SYSTEM COMMANDS
Table 1-21.
Report information
Report information
Report header
Report activity
Report user
Report activity
Report billing
Description
Includes the system type, time, date, customer ID (disk ID), and the system ID.
Provides system activity information for all user accounts. The system activity report summarizes system activity by retrieving information from the system activity log file.
Provides user and system activity information for the specified user account. The customer billing report summarizes billing information by retrieving billing meter information from the printer non-volatile memory (NVM).
Provides system activity information for all user accounts. The system activity report summarizes system activity by retrieving information from the system activity log file.
Provides page count information on the following:
• Total print job output
• Subtotal output produced by the black and highlight xerographic modes
• Total output produced by the diagnostic mode.
The user accounting report summarizes the user accounting information by retrieving information from the user accounting log file.
Syntax
Parameter options
The customer billing, user accounting, and system activity reports print in the system portrait font P0612$.FNT by default. You can specify another font by creating a DFLT.SYS file. The font specified must be fixed pitch, portrait, and 12-point or smaller, and consist of any or all of these records:
• BLRPTF = font-id (specifies customer billing font)
• ACRPTF = font-id (specifies activity report font)
• SARPTF = font-id (specifies system activity font).
Completed reports can be:
• Shown on the keyboard or display
• Printed
• Shown on the keyboard or display and printed
• Printed and cleared from the information log files (system activity and user accounting reports only)
• Displayed, printed, and cleared from the log file (system activity and user accounting reports only).
Successful delivery includes any user-specified point of delivery and dynamically diverted sheets (sheets diverted to the sample tray because of an output jam, and transparencies diverted to the sample tray). Sheets purged after restart are not counted.
REPORT keyword action keyword
BILLING, ACTIVITY, or USER
Required parameter that specifies the report type.
action
DISPLAY or PRINT
Displays or prints the report.
1-84 XEROX 4050/4090/4450/4650 LPS COMMAND REFERENCE
Default
Syntax
Parameter options
Syntax
Considerations
Syntax
SYSTEM COMMANDS
CLEAR
Resets system values to zero after printing or displaying the report.
The default is DISPLAY.
System serial number
The first time you enter the REPORT command after you run a full sysgen or reformat the system disks, you are prompted to enter the nine-character system serial number located on a silver metal plate inside the front right-hand door of the printer. If your entry is valid, the information is saved in the MCHID$.SYS
file. You are prompted only once for the serial number. If the
MCHID$.SYS file is not on the system, you are prompted for the serial number each time you run the REPORT utility.
AAAnnnnnn
A
Specifies the product code, and can be any uppercase alphanumeric character.
n
Specifies a unique serial number for your system, and can be any numeric character.
RESET
Stops all system processing activity, removes all print jobs from the job queue, and cycles any pages in the printer paper path to the print tray. When you display the queue, all of these reports show a status of RESET. The system remains in an idle state until you enter the next command.
If the input device is tape, the tape remains positioned as it was when the RESET command executed.
The command should be restricted with RCU to levels 2 through
5.
To terminate a job before it completes, enter the ABORT command rather than the RESET command.
RESET
If RESET executes during job processing, accounting data is recorded in the system accounting file only for reports that are completely processed and printed.
For systems configured with a stitcher/stacker, if RESET executes while a job is in process, the system holds a few sheets in the stitching tray. These sheets are released at the start of the next job.
REVIEW
Reviews each file in a directory with the option to delete it. The file names display one at a time. You can delete a file by entering D, or exit the display process by entering the X command.
REVIEW disk-id file-id,file-id,...
XEROX 4050/4090/4450/4650 LPS COMMAND REFERENCE 1-85
SYSTEM COMMANDS
Parameter options
Logon level
Considerations disk-id
Specifies the system disk (DP0:, DP1:, DP2:, DP3:) that contains the specified directory.
file-id
Specifies the file as file-name.file-type. (Masking can be used.)
The logon levels are 1 through 5.
To delete a file from the system, you must have the required logon level.
You cannot delete any file name containing a period or dollar sign. The following message displays:
*PROTECTED*
Any other response (for example, pressing the space bar) saves the file and the next file name being displayed.
REWIND
Syntax
Rewinds the tape or cartridge either by entering this command or by taking the drive offline and performing a manual rewind when a tape or cartridge job completes (including jobs with the single report option).
This command operates on the tape or cartridge device that has been assigned to the TAPE keyword using the SUB DEV command.
Use REWIND rather than TAPE REWIND after issuing the MOVE command. (The MOVE command followed by the TAPE REWIND command can result in the misleading message
Tape went offline during operation
. In this case, you should ignore the message.)
REWIND
RNAME
Syntax
Parameter options
Logon level
Changes the name of a file.
RNAME old-file-id new-file-id
If you specify only the file name, the file type remains the same.
Rename files one at a time.
old-file-id
Specifies the current file name.
new-file-id
Specifies the file-name.file-type to replace the old-file-id.
The logon levels are 1 through 5.
SAMPLE
Request a sample print while a job is printing or to print a form, logo, image file, or font set when the system is idle. Each sample print that includes graphics provides a descriptor page with metric data identifying the color format. When a job is printing, the next page to be printed is printed twice. One copy is delivered to an output tray, the other is delivered to the sample print tray. Use samples to check the print quality and
1-86 XEROX 4050/4090/4450/4650 LPS COMMAND REFERENCE
Logon levels
Considerations
Syntax
Parameter options
SYSTEM COMMANDS alignment of a job. If the system is idle, you must identify the file that you want to sample.
The logon levels are 1 through 5.
All sample jobs, except form samples, are formatted for printing using the default paper size specified at system generation.
(Form samples are formatted using the paper size specified by the form if one is specified, or the default paper size specified at system generation.)
You can sample an image only if the default paper size is larger than the graphic image.
When sampling multiple forms or color palettes using a wildcard specification, make sure that the FONTS command setting is 67 or higher, and that the FORMS command is set to 2. This prevents errors resulting from insufficient memory.
A sample font prints only in black and white. Do not add color parameters to a sample command that specifies a font file.
SAMPLE with parameters is not available during HIP printing.
You cannot print a sample if the document has fewer than three pages or if ABNORMAL SECURITY=YES is coded in the job descriptor library of the report being processed.
If you sample multiple font, form, or logo files without specifying an override ink list, numerous mismatch conditions may occur.
Your system must be equipped with the GVG2 processor hardware option in order to sample image files.
The system breaks large sample jobs (more than approximately
1,000 sampled files) into multiple print jobs.
Do not delete SAMCM1.CME. It is required for sampling files.
When Tape or Disk jobs are running, the SAMPLE command with parameters is not allowed.
For non-English sysgens, use of the translated SAMPLE command with optional position information does not work., for example,
SAM XVGHO.IMG,,,(.5in, .5in). Use the English command.
SAMPLE — print a font, form, or logo
Requests a sample print of a font, form, or logo. Samples are automatically sent to the output stacker tray. If you do not enter parameters, this command prints a second copy of the next page of the file being printed.
SAMPLE keyword
1
.file-type
1
,sides,n keyword
1 file-name
1
Specifies the name of the file you want to sample.
mask
A generic file name which may select multiple files for printing. Within the mask, one or more question marks
(?) or asterisks (*) are substituted for valid characters.
Each file name is compared to the mask and a sample is printed for each equal comparison. An asterisk or question mark equals any character. If the last character of the mask is an asterisk, characters in subsequent positions equal the asterisk. If the last character of the
XEROX 4050/4090/4450/4650 LPS COMMAND REFERENCE 1-87
SYSTEM COMMANDS
Considerations
Syntax
Parameter options
Considerations
Syntax mask is a question mark, files with names longer than the mask are not sampled.
file-type
1
Must be FRM, FNT or LGO.
sides
D or S
Specifies duplex (D) or simplex (S) prints. Duplex prints the file on both sides of the page. The default is simplex.
n
Specifies the number of copies to print. The default is one.
When you use SAMPLE*.FRM to print all forms, the form name prints on the edge of each form. Regardless of the form orientation, the name prints portrait.
The override ink list is specified for multiple font, form, or logo file samples to prevent primary color mismatch conditions.
When you print multiple files, they all print simplex even though you specify duplex.
SAMPLE with parameter options is not available during HIP printing.
SAMPLE — print multiple copies of a form
Prints up to 32,767 copies of a form.
SAMPLE file-name
1
.TST,sides file-name
1
The name of the form file in the FRM library.
.TST
Specifies multiple copies of the form file.
sides
D or S
Specifies duplex (D) or simplex (S) prints. Duplex prints the file on both sides of the page.
SAMPLE with parameter options is not available during HIP printing.
The specified form prints repeatedly until you issue the STOP or
ABORT command.
If you entered SELECT n, SAMPLE, the copies are delivered to an output stacker tray. Otherwise, the copies go to the sample tray.
SAMPLE — print a graphic
Samples print .IMG files. The extended options describe the horizontal or vertical positioning, orientation, and scaling of the image to print. For each graphic you specify, the SAMPLE command prints two pages: the first page is an image, the second is a descriptor page containing metric data.
SAMPLE keyword
1
.IMG,sides,n,vpos,hpos,
orientation,n/d,INKS=keyword
2
1-88 XEROX 4050/4090/4450/4650 LPS COMMAND REFERENCE
Parameter options
Considerations
SYSTEM COMMANDS keyword
1 file-name
Identifies the graphic to be sampled.
mask
A generic file-name which selects multiple graphic files.
Within the mask, one or more question marks (?) and/or asterisks (*) are substituted for legal alphanumeric characters. The name of each .IMG file on the disk is compared to the mask, and a sample of the graphic is printed for each equal comparison. In file-name comparison, an asterisk or question mark equals any character. If the last character of the mask is an asterisk, characters in subsequent positions equal the asterisk. If the last character of the mask is a question mark, any subsequent positions must be blank (such as files with names longer than the mask are not sampled). Samples are sent automatically to the output stacker tray.
sides
D or S
Specifies duplex (D) or simplex (S) prints. Duplex prints the file on both sides of the page. The default is simplex.
n
Specifies the number of copies to print. The default is one copy.
vpos
Specifies the vertical position of the top edge of the graphic, relative to the physical page origin in dots, centimeters (cm), or inches (in), specified as a decimal number with up to three digits to the right of the decimal point. If you do not specify units, inches are assumed. The default is top left.
hpos
Specifies the horizontal position of the left edge of the graphic relative to the physical page origin. The form of this specification (cm, in, or dots) is the same as for vpos. The default is top left.
orientation
L or P
Specifies a position reference orientation (landscape or portrait) for the graphic. The file header may specify the default orientation; otherwise the default is portrait.
n/d
Specifies the reference scale factor. Each parameter, n and d must be an integer between 1 and 8, inclusive, resulting in a reference scale factor between 1/8 to 8, inclusive. The reference allowing a reference scale factor is multiplied with that specified at the time the graphic was digitized, and the product is rounded to the nearest integer in the range 1 to 8.
That integer becomes the effective scale factor with which the graphic is imaged. If the reference scale factor specified in the SAMPLE command is too large (so that the graphic exceeds the page size), the specified reference scale factor is flagged with an asterisk (*) on the descriptor page and a reference scale factor of one is used.
SAMPLE is not available during HIP printing.
XEROX 4050/4090/4450/4650 LPS COMMAND REFERENCE 1-89
SYSTEM COMMANDS
SCALE
SCHEDULE
Syntax
Parameter options
Logon level
Converts files from 300 spi to 600 spi.
SCALE input-file-name.file-type
[/al/bl/ol/5]b
1 output-file-name.file-type
2
/ input-file-name
Specifies the font (.FNT), form (.FRM), or logo (.LGO) file to be converted to 600 spi.
file-type
1
Specifies the file type as .FNT, .FRM, or .LGO.
output-filename
Specifies the name for the new 600 spi file.
file-type
2
Specifies the file type as .FNT or .FN6, .FRM or .FR6, .LGO or
.LG6, .MSC or .TMP; usually “6” is substituted for the last character of the original file type.
/a
Assigns a character width of 255, if there is an overflow in the byte escapement.
/b
Bit doubles the font or logo bitmaps instead of using the interpolation formula to scale the input file.
/o
Forces overwrite of the output file, if it already exists.
/5
Forces the creation of a five-word FSTS.
The logon levels are 1 through 5.
Syntax
Logon level
Parameters
Selects the scheduling mode (single, multiple, or received). The scheduling mode affects the order in which reports print.
You can enter #entry-string with this command to submit documents immediately to output for printing once the current documents in output are completed.
The SCHEDULE #entry-string command schedules reports for printing even if the resources required to print it are not available on the system. If you schedule a report and it requires resources that are not available (color, stitching, and so on), the system stops printing and waits for operator intervention: change the ink, substitute inks, enable stitching, and so on.
SCHEDULE [SINGLE|MULTIPLE|RECEIVED|#entry-string]
Levels 1 through 5.
No parameters entered
Displays the current scheduling mode and state.
SINGLE
Places all documents which use the loaded color ink (or current ink substitutions), or wire if stitching is on, in the active state. Holds all documents which do not.
1-90 XEROX 4050/4090/4450/4650 LPS COMMAND REFERENCE
Syntax
Parameter options
Logon level
Considerations
Exceptions
SYSTEM COMMANDS
MULTIPLE
Places all documents that use multiple color inks in the active state.
RECEIVED
Places documents in the active state in the order in which they are prepared by input processing.
#entry-string
Specifies an entry in the #n, #n-m, or #(n-m,o,p-r) format.
#n
Specifies a single entry; n must be an integer between 1 and 65535.
#n-m
Specifies one set of multiple entries; n and m must be integers between 1 and 65535. All entries between n and m, inclusive, are passed to output.
#(n-m,o,p-r)
Specifies multiple sets of entries; n, m, o, p, and r must be integers between 1 and 65535. All entries between n and m, inclusive, and p and r, inclusive, are passed to output. You must use parenthesis around the string and commas without spaces between string elements.
SECURE
Prevents access to the specified files from logon levels 1 through
4.
The editor supports the security feature by maintaining the security characteristics of the files that it manipulates (such as a renamed secured file retains its security characteristics). An unsecured file that replaces a secured file makes the file unsecured. However, if a secured font is referenced in a forms source library (.FSL) file compiled at logon level 5, the .FSL file and resulting .FRM file are not automatically secured. It is your responsibility to secure the .FSL and .FRM files. Likewise, if you copy a secured file to a new file or over an existing unsecured file, the resulting file is unsecured.
SECURE file-name.file-type file-name
A six-character name of a disk file.
file-type
One of the following extensions: CMD, CME, FNT, FRM,
FSL, IMG, JDL, JSL, LGO, PDE, TST, STK, and LIB.
The following editor commands are affected by the secured file feature: COPY, DELETE, FID, FILE, FIX, FLOPPY, GET, LIST,
MERGE, REVIEW, RNAME, and SAVE.
The logon levels are 2 through 5.
A secured file cannot be copied to tape. While printing a job, unauthorized file access attempts abort the print job, and the message
SECURITY VIOLATION displays after the message
PROBLEM
WITH FILE.
. . .
If a font or logo file has been secured to a particular logon level, the file cannot be copied or modified from lower logon classes.
XEROX 4050/4090/4450/4650 LPS COMMAND REFERENCE 1-91
SYSTEM COMMANDS
SELECT
1-92
It can, however, be made usable for printing with the FIX command from any logon class.
The contents of a secured file are left in the working storage area when it is manipulated by the editor. Issue a CLEAR command when terminating an edit session to prevent unauthorized access.
This type of unauthorized access is not detected or reported.
Syntax
Parameter options
Logon level
Considerations
Specifies the active output tray or allows the system to select it automatically. Manual bin selection allows you to fill the selected bin. When full, the operating system stops the printer.
Automatic bin selection allows you to fill the active bin. When full, the operating system automatically changes to the alternate tray, thus allowing printing to continue and providing for improved throughput due to the overlapped operation. For both selection modes, approximately 14 pages are delivered to the previously active bin after a new bin selection is made.
Thereafter, pages are delivered to the new bin if it is ready.
SELECT or keyword
1
,SAMPLE
SELECT keyword
2 keyword
1
1 or 2 or E
Selects a specific tray by the bin number or by entering
“E” for the Bypass Transport (BT) output device. If the bin you select is not ready, the printer cycles down and issues an appropriate message. Whenever the bin you select is full, the printer cycles down. Select tray 1 for the stitcher. With the stitcher/stacker, entering “E” for the Bypass Transport output device is an option for XDDI only.
SAMPLE
Selects the specified bin as the active bin to fill, and assigns the remaining bin as a logical sample bin. If the bin you select is not ready, the printer cycles down and issues an appropriate message. If you enter a SELECT command with only a bin number (1 or 2), it cancels the SAMPLE option.
keyword
2
AUTO
Selects the alternate bin automatically when the active bin becomes full. Selects active bin if ready, or automatically changes role of bins at initiation of printing.
TRAY
Directs printed output to the top sample tray until you enter another SELECT command.
The logon levels are 1 through 5.
You must direct transparencies to the sample tray.
If you enter SELECT without an operand, the alternate bin is selected but the mode does not change (for example, if in
AUTO, it remains in AUTO; if specific, it remains so). The
SAMPLE option is not canceled if the SAMPLE option was previously invoked to specify a bin as the logical sample tray.
When you enter SELECT without an operand, the alternate bin is selected and the remaining bin becomes the sample tray. In other words, the active bin and the sample tray change roles.
XEROX 4050/4090/4450/4650 LPS COMMAND REFERENCE
Syntax
Parameter options
Considerations
Logon level
Syntax
Parameters
Syntax
Parameter options
SYSTEM COMMANDS
Any attempt to designate the stitcher/stacker as an alternate sample destination (such as SELECT 1, SAMPLE, or SELECT 2,
SAMPLE) is unacceptable by output.
For XDDI only, if SELECT AUTO is entered when a Bypass
Transport output device is attached to the printer, the following message is displayed:
OS1295 Destination trays not configured for this command
SEPARATE
Sends the next output report processed to the other output tray.
SEPARATE OFF
(no parameter)
Enables SEPARATE processing.
OFF
Disables SEPARATE processing.
A bin change occurs only if the new bin is ready (it is not full or jammed). SEPARATE is disabled by one of the following:
• End of report
• SEPARATE OFF
• Current bin fills before the end of the report
• SELECT command
• SEPARATE remains in effect for the duration of the current report. At end of report, the bin change occurs, and
SEPARATE is disabled until you request it again.
SET QUEUE DISPLAY
Use this command to specify the type of information to display in the print queue. The option you specify remains in effect until you change it again.
The logon levels are 1 through 5.
SET QUEUE DISPLAY [BRIEF|FULL|CLASSIC]
BRIEF
Displays information in the BRIEF format. This is the default.
CLASSIC
Displays information in the CLASSIC format.
FULL
Displays information in the FULL format.
Refer to the “JOBS” section, earlier in this chapter, for examples of each queue display format.
SETTIME
Sets the system time and date.
SETTIME value value mm
Specifies the month with a number between 1 and 12.
XEROX 4050/4090/4450/4650 LPS COMMAND REFERENCE 1-93
SYSTEM COMMANDS
@SETTMO
SFC
1-94
Logon level
Considerations mmm
Specifies the month with a three-character abbreviation:
JAN, FEB, MAR, APR, MAY, JUN, JUL, AUG, SEP, OCT,
NOV, or DEC.
/
Date delimiter: a slash (/) or hyphen (-), which is required with mm,dd,yy variables.
dd
Specifies the day of the month with a one- or two-digit number.
yy
Specifies the last two digits of the year.
hh
Specifies the hour, using a 24-hour clock (military time).
The system does not accept a zero (0) as the first digit of this parameter.
:
The time-field delimiter: a colon (:) or space.
mm
Specifies the minute of the hour.
ss
Specifies the seconds field, which is optional.
The logon levels are 2 through 5.
You can enter this command only when the system is idle (such as offline with no background tasks running and not printing).
Logon level
Syntax
Changes the maximum period the system waits before sending the DEVICE END status to the host. Increase the maximum period if you receive INTERVENTION REQUIRED errors at the host computer. Decrease the maximum period if you are experiencing printer errors at the host.
After entry of this command, follow the prompts to change the timeout intervals.
The logon levels are 1 through 5.
@SETTMO
Syntax
The following are Status File Converter (SFC) commands.
SFC
Converts the QUE.SYS file to STAFIL.SYS.
SFC
SFC SAVE
Gains access to the QUE.SYS data file and copies it to a temporary file for storage or archival.
XEROX 4050/4090/4450/4650 LPS COMMAND REFERENCE
Syntax
Parameter
Logon level
Restriction
Syntax
Parameters
Logon level
Logon level
Syntax
Parameters
SYSTEM COMMANDS
SFC SAVE [[filename][.file-type]] filename
One to six alphanumeric characters specifying a temporary file for storage of the QUE.SYS data file. The default is QUE if you do not specify one.
file-type
Lets you specify .MSC as the temporary file. The default is
.TMP if you do not specify .MSC.
The logon levels are 1 through 5.
SFC SAVE cannot be performed when there are unprinted entries in the queue. It is solely to preserve the information of a job after it printed.
SFC SFS DISPLAY
Converts the QUE.SYS file to STAFIL.SYS and displays the status file entries.
SFC SFS DISPLAY [,SHORT|COMPLETE][,num]
SHORT
Displays the print queue database summary in the short format, which lists the processed jobs. The short summary format contains the following fields: BLOCK NO., JOB NO.,
REPORT NO., and ENTRY STATUS.
COMPLETE
Displays all information in the print queue database summary, one entry at a time. This is the default.
num
Number of entries to display, where n and m are integers equal to or greater than one, and equal to or less than the maximum number of entries in the print queue database.
n
First n entries.
m
Last m entries.
n-m
All entries between n and m, inclusive. If n=m, only one entry displays.
n
1
;n
2
;...n
10
Up to ten discrete entries, where n is the nth file entry or a range of entries in the form n-m. You must specify entries in ascending order.
The logon levels are 1 through 5.
SFC SFS filename
Converts the QUE.SYS file to STAFIL.SYS and prints a status report.
The logon levels are 1 through 5.
SFC SFS filename [,[SIMPLEX|DUPLEX|TEST][,[c][,num]]]
No parameters entered
With no parameters entered, prints all entries.
XEROX 4050/4090/4450/4650 LPS COMMAND REFERENCE 1-95
SYSTEM COMMANDS
1-96
Restrictions
Logon level
Syntax
Parameters filename
Specifies a user-created form file on disk, which has the format and content of a status report. The file name may be one to six characters (A through Z, 0 through 9). The file extension is .MSC and should not be specified. For more information about this file, refer to the Xerox 4850/4890
HighLight Color LPS System Programming and Administration
Guide.
SIMPLEX
Prints the report on one side of the paper. This is the default.
DUPLEX
Prints the report on both sides of the paper.
TEST
Prints only the report and column header information and delivers it to the sample tray.
c
Number of copies to print. The default value is 1.
num
Number of entries printed as follows (must be equal to or greater than one, and equal to or less than the maximum number of entries in the print queue database): n
First n entries.
-m
Last m entries.
n-m
All entries between n and m, inclusive.
n
1
;n
2
;...n
10
Up to ten discrete entries, where n is the nth file entry, or a range of entries n-m.
You must specify the entries in ascending order.
Avoid specifying an entry number [num] that does not exist in the SFS command.
SFC SFS HARDCOPY
Converts the QUE.SYS file to STAFIL.SYS and prints the status report.
The logon levels are 1 through 5.
SFC SFS HARDCOPY [,[SHORT|COMPLETE]
[,[SIMPLEX|DUPLEX] [,copies][,num]]
SHORT
Prints the status report in the short format which specifies the block number, the job number, the entry number, and the entry status.
COMPLETE
Prints the status report in the long format. This is the default.
SIMPLEX
Prints the status report on one side of the paper. This is the default.
XEROX 4050/4090/4450/4650 LPS COMMAND REFERENCE
Restrictions
Logon level
Syntax
Parameters
SYSTEM COMMANDS
DUPLEX
Prints the status report on both sides of the paper.
TEST
Prints only the report and column header information and delivers it to the sample tray.
copies
Number of copies requested.
num
Number of entries displayed, as follows: n
First n entries.
-m
Last m entries.
n-m
All entries between n and m, inclusive.
n
1
;n
2
;...n
10
Up to ten entries, where n is the nth file entry, or a range of entries n-m.
The values you specify must be equal to or greater than one, and equal to or less than the maximum number of entries in the print queue database.
You must specify entries in ascending order.
If requested entries have not been used (filled in), an error displays (coded as SF9500).
You cannot specify discrete sets of entries with this command.
SFC SFS HOST
Converts the QUE.SYS file to STAFIL.SYS and formats the status file to transmit to a remote host. This command does not actually transmit the file.
The logon levels are 1 through 5.
SFC SFS HOST [,[fmt][,num]]
No parameters entered
Formats all entries for transmission.
fmt
Specified data format of EBCDIC or ASCII. The default is
ASCII.
num
Number of entries displayed, as follows: n
First n entries.
-m
Last m entries.
n-m
All entries between n and m, inclusive.
n
1
;n
2
;...n
10
Up to ten discrete entries, where n is the nth file entry or a range of entries n-m.
XEROX 4050/4090/4450/4650 LPS COMMAND REFERENCE 1-97
SYSTEM COMMANDS
SFS DISPLAY
Restrictions
Syntax
Parameters
Logon level
Restrictions
You must specify entries in ascending order.
The values you specify must be equal to or greater than one, and equal to or less than the maximum number of entries in the print queue database.
If requested entries have not been used (filled in), an error displays (coded as SF9500).
You cannot specify discrete sets of entries with this command.
SFC SFS TAPE
Use this command to convert the QUE.SYS file to SYSFIL.SYS and save the status file on a tape.
SFC SFS TAPE [,[fmt][,[blk][,[den][,num]]]]
No parameters entered
Saves all entries.
fmt
Specifies data format: EBCDIC or ASCII. The default is
ASCII.
blk
Specifies the block length in bytes: 80, 256, or 512. The default is 256.
den
Specifies the tape density: 1600 or 6250. The default is
1600.
num
Number of entries saved, as follows:
n
First n entries.
-m
Last m entries.
n-m
All entries between n and m, inclusive.
The logon levels are 1 through 5.
The SFS tape is created for processing on your host computer; it cannot be used by the LPS.
The values you specify must be equal to or greater than one, and equal to or less than the maximum number of entries in the print queue database.
If requested entries have not been used (filled in), an error displays (coded as SF9500).
You cannot specify discrete sets of entries with this command.
Syntax
Displays print queue database entries. You receive a prompt that allows you to continue or stop the display.
SFS DISPLAY,type,num
1-98 XEROX 4050/4090/4450/4650 LPS COMMAND REFERENCE
Parameter options
Default
Syntax
Parameter options
SYSTEM COMMANDS type
SHORT
Displays the print queue database summary in the short format which lists the processed jobs. The short summary format contains the following fields: BLOCK
NO., JOB NO., REPORT NO., and ENTRY STATUS.
COMPLETE
Displays all information in the print queue database summary, one entry at a time.
num
Specifies the number of entries to display, where n and m are integers. The values you specify must be equal to or greater than one, and equal to or less than the maximum number of entries in the print queue database.
n
Specifies the first n entries.
-m
Specifies the last m entries.
n-m
Specifies all entries between n and m, inclusive. If n=m, only one entry displays.
n
1
;n
2
;...n
10
Specifies 1 to 10 discrete entries, where n is the nth file entry or a range of entries in the form n-m. You must specify entries in ascending order.
The default displays all entries.
SFS file-name
Prints the contents of the print queue database in simplex or duplex, and selects the tray from which to print.
SFS file-name,sides,c,num file-name
Specifies a one- to six-character name of an .FRM file designed to print the queue database contents. Its file type must be .MSC and should not be specified.
sides
SIMPLEX
Prints the report on one side of the paper.
DUPLEX
Prints the report on both sides of the paper.
TEST
Prints only the report and column header information and delivers it to the sample tray.
c
Specifies the number of copies to print.
num
Specifies the number of entries printed as follows: n
The first n entries.
XEROX 4050/4090/4450/4650 LPS COMMAND REFERENCE 1-99
SYSTEM COMMANDS
Default
Considerations
-m
The last m entries.
n-m
All entries between n and m, inclusive.
n
1
;n
2
;...n
10
1 to 10 discrete entries, where n is the nth file entry, or a range of entries n-m.
The specified value(s) must be equal to or greater than one and equal to or less than the maximum number of entries in the print queue database.
The default value is 1.
You must specify the entries in ascending order.
Avoid specifying an entry number [num] that does not exist in the SFS command.
SFS HARDCOPY
Syntax
Parameter options
Default
Considerations
Prints a report of the print queue database contents and delivers the report to the selected print tray.
SFS HARDCOPY,length,sides,,num length
SHORT
Prints the status report in the short format which specifies the block number, the job number, the entry number, and the entry status.
COMPLETE
Prints the status report in the long format.
sides
SIMPLEX
Prints the status report on one side of the paper.
DUPLEX
Prints the status report on both sides of the paper.
num
Specifies the number of entries displayed specified as follows: n
The first n entries.
-m
The last m entries.
n-m
All entries between n and m, inclusive.
n
1
;n
2
;...n
10
1 to 10 entries, where n is the nth file entry, or a range of entries n-m.
The values you specify must be equal to or greater than one, and equal to or less than the maximum number of entries in the print queue database.
The default prints all entries.
You must specify entries in ascending order.
1-100 XEROX 4050/4090/4450/4650 LPS COMMAND REFERENCE
Syntax
Parameter options
Default
Considerations
Syntax
Parameter options
SYSTEM COMMANDS
If the requested entries have not been used (filled in), an error displays (coded as SF9500).
You cannot specify discrete sets of entries with this command.
SFS HOST
Formats the print queue database for transmission to a remote host and saves this host-format file to the LPS disk, using the file name SFASEB.MSC. The LPS-to-host file transfer interface can then be used to transfer the file. (The SFS HOST command does not send the print queue database file to the host.)
SFS HOST,fmt,num fmt
Specifies the data format: EBCDIC or ASCII.
num
Specifies the number of entries displayed as follows: n
The first n entries.
-m
The last m entries.
n-m
All entries between n and m, inclusive.
n
1
;n
2
;...n
10
1 to 10 discrete entries, where n is the nth file entry or a range of entries n-m.
The default format is ASCII.
You must specify entries in ascending order.
The values you specify must be equal to or greater than one, and equal to or less than the maximum number of entries in the print queue database.
If the requested entries have not been used (filled in), an error displays (coded as SF9500).
You cannot specify discrete sets of entries with this command.
SFS TAPE
Copies the print queue database to an LPS-labeled tape.
SFS TAPE,fmt,blk,den,num fmt
Specifies the data format: EBCDIC or ASCII.
blk
Specifies the block length in bytes: 80, 256, or 512.
den
Specifies the tape density: 1600 or 6250.
num
Specifies the number of entries saved as follows: n
First n entries.
XEROX 4050/4090/4450/4650 LPS COMMAND REFERENCE 1-101
SYSTEM COMMANDS
SFS!
SFT
Default
Considerations
-m
Last m entries.
n-m
All entries between n and m, inclusive.
The default for fmt is ASCII. The default for blk is 256 and the default for den is 1600.
SFS tape is created for processing on your host computer; it cannot be used by the LPS.
The values you specify must be equal to or greater than one, and equal to or less than the maximum number of entries in the print queue database.
If the requested entries have not been used (filled in), an error displays (coded as SF9500).
You cannot specify discrete sets of entries with this command.
Syntax
Logon level
Abbreviates the SFS TAPE,EBCDIC,80,1600 command.
SFS !
The logon levels are 1 through 5.
Syntax
Logon levels
Considerations
Transfers single files from a DSR tape to a system disk drive. The system determines which disk the file is copied to.
SFT
The logon levels are 2 through 5.
SFT restores files only from tapes created with DSR.
You can copy only one file at a time from tape to disk.
When writing a file to disk, SFT deletes the file on the disk (if it already exists) and writes the file from the DSR tape to the first location on the disk which can accommodate the file size.
Specify the full file name; SFT does not support wildcards.
Do not copy .$Y$, .SAF, .SYS, .TSK, or .LOG files.
If two files have the same name on the DSR tape, SFT writes only the first file to disk.
If a system disk is full, SFT writes the specified file to the next disk.
The system disks must be structurally intact and consistent.
1-102 XEROX 4050/4090/4450/4650 LPS COMMAND REFERENCE
SYSTEM COMMANDS
Syntax
Logon level
Example
SHOW QUEUE STATUS
Displays the following print queue information:
• Queue display mode
• Queue Manager status
• Schedule mode
• Status of STITCH
• Jobs in the input job queue
• Documents queued for output processing.
SHOW QUEUE STATUS
The logon levels are 1 through 5.
An example of the SHOW QUEUE STATUS display is shown in figure 1-14.
Figure 1-14.
Example display
Queue status mm/dd/yy hh:mm:ss
Queue manager is xxxxxx schedule mode is xxxx
System is OFF-LINE
Stitch off active
Job queue is xxxxxx n reports queued requiring CYAN primary n reports queued requiring MAGENTA primary n reports queued requiring GREEN primary n reports queued requiring BLUE primary n reports queued requiring RED primary n reports queued requiring multiple primary n reports queued requiring stitching
OS1000 READY FOR COMMANDS hh:mm;ss
Syntax
Parameter options
SPACE n REPORTS
Positions a tape or cartridge by logical reports within the limits of the start-of-job tape position and the end-of-data, along with the
REPORTS option. Enter the START command first to initiate a job before you enter the SPACE command.
This command operates on the tape or cartridge device that has been assigned to the TAPE keyword using the SUB DEV command.
SPACE n REPORTS n
Specifies a decimal integer in the range -32768 to +32767.
A positive number indicates forward report spacing, and a negative number indicates backward spacing. The tape cannot be positioned before the start-of-job tape position or after end-of-data. If the start-of-tape position is on another tape, the tape cannot be positioned to it.
XEROX 4050/4090/4450/4650 LPS COMMAND REFERENCE 1-103
SYSTEM COMMANDS
Considerations You can enter a SPACE command any time after initiating a job only if the following conditions are met:
• Input is stopped. Use the STOP INPUT command; it is confirmed by the message
INPUT STOPPED
, or when the system is suspended.
• START command did not specify the REPORTS option.
SPACE n PAGES
1-104
Syntax
Parameter options
Logon level
Considerations
Positions pages forward and backward within the current report during report printing. During forward page spacing, if output catches up with input, output displays a message indicating that this has occurred and resumes spacing when the catchup condition no longer exists. While output is being caught up, output accepts and processes other commands with the exception of the SAMPLE command.
An accounting page is produced at the end of the report, indicating that the page spacing was performed.
SPACE n PAGES n
Specifies a decimal integer in the range -32768 to +32767.
A positive number spaces forward over N pages unless endof-report is encountered first. If encountered, no further forward spacing is allowed until printing is resumed. A negative value spaces backwards over N pages unless the beginning is encountered. If encountered, no further backward spacing is allowed until printing is resumed.
The logon levels are 1 through 5.
A sample cannot be obtained during spacing.
Once you begin page spacing, you cannot stop it before the specified number of pages have been spaced without aborting the report.
Prior to selecting the PAGE SPACE command, stop output via the
STOP or STOP O command. After the PAGE SPACE command, resume printing using the CONTINUE or CONTINUE O command.
n must include all pages, including the system-generated pages.
Page spacing is not executed when:
• ABNORMAL SECURITY=YES is coded in the JDE/JDL in effect.
The
OS1420 SPACING NOT ALLOWED BY JDE message displays.
• The current report is n-1. The
OS1421 SPACING NOT ALLOWED
FOR N-1 REPORTS
message displays.
• Output is not stopped. The
OS2840 OUTPUT MUST BE STOPPED
BEFORE PAGE SPACING CAN BE DONE
message displays.
• Output is not currently working on a job. The
OS2715
COMMAND IGNORED...RETRY LATER message displays.
Backward spacing is not allowed if the system is printing the last
(or only) copy of a collated report.
For duplex printing, page spacing prints on the front and back of each sheet. Therefore, if you enter an odd page count in a space command, the total number of pages actually spaced is 1 greater. Page spacing logic counts physical sides of sheets; both
XEROX 4050/4090/4450/4650 LPS COMMAND REFERENCE
Example
Syntax
Parameter options
Add syntax
Add parameter options
Add Considerations
Delete Syntax
Delete parameter options
SYSTEM COMMANDS sides in duplex, and only one side in simplex. No consideration is given to logical pages on any physical side.
For example, a report requires 5 sheets in duplex, 10 sheets in simplex, and each side consists of four logical pages (4-up) for a total of 40 logical pages, and you issue a space command of 3 pages. In simplex, the system delivers 3 sheets, for a total of 12 logical pages. In duplex, the system increments the odd space count to 4, such that 2 sheets will be delivered (16 logical pages).
Creates a system software tape. You can also perform the following tasks:
• Create backups of Xerox labeled tapes, primarily of SST.
(These are referred to as “offline” SST in the system prompts.)
• Create backups of SST tapes which can be read from your host and downloaded to the LPS. (These are referred to as
“online” SST tapes in the system prompts.)
• Modify an SST tape by deleting or replacing files on it.
• Restore a file from the SST tape to the LPS.
• Copy the restored files to another SST tape.
• Delete the restored files from the LPS disk.
The SST tape you create with SST is used to run a full offline or online system generation.
Once you enter the command, the system prompts you with menu choices.
SST
None to create backups, restore files to the LPS, copy restored files to another tape, or delete the restored files. ADD, DELETE, and MOVE allow you to modify files on the SST tape or cartridge.
ADD /BF:n file-name
1
file-name
2
ADD
Adds a file which resides on the disk to the list.
/BF:n
Assigns a blocking factor from 1 to 16 to the added file.
file-name
1
Specifies the file in the list after which file-name
2 added. file-name
1 name
2
to the beginning of a list.
is to be
may be the word BEGIN which adds file- file-name
2
The file residing on the disk that is to be added to the list.
The ADD command does not include a date in the tape header.
DELETE file-name
DELETE
Deletes the file from the list.
file-name
Specifies the file name to be deleted from the list.
SST
XEROX 4050/4090/4450/4650 LPS COMMAND REFERENCE 1-105
SYSTEM COMMANDS
Move Syntax
Move parameter options
Logon level
Considerations
MOVE keyword,file-name
2
MOVE
Moves a file from one position on the list to another.
keyword
BEGIN
Moves file-name
2
to the beginning of the list.
file-name
1
Moves file-name
2
after the specified file name.
file-name
2
Specifies the list of files to be moved.
The logon level is 4 or 5.
You can copy 1 to 1350 files with SST or system software cartridge (SSC).
The tape used to duplicate the original SST should be the same density.
START
Syntax
Interpress syntax
Parameter options
Initiates a print job or prints a tape dump.
START — submit a print job
Submits a print job and uses the various options depending upon the input source and the output destination. The print data will be read from the tape or cartridge device that has been assigned to the TAPE keyword using the SUB DEV command.
You can enter another START or a SAMPLE command while the previous START command is executing.
START jde,jdl,value,copies,REPORTS:r
1
,r
2
,...
START jde,jdl,,copies,DISC:document-name jde
A one- to six-character identifier for the job descriptor entry to be used in processing the job. If you omit this entry, the user-specified default (DFLT) of the job descriptor library is used.
jdl
A one- to six-character identifier of the job descriptor library for the print job. It must be listed in the jdl file directory. If you omit this entry, the default jdl with the identifier DFAULT in the PDL SYSTEM command is used.
value
S or M
Specifies single report (S) or multiple report (M). The default is multiple report. Single report halts the system after processing each report to allow you to select the job setup parameters for the next report by entering a new START command. The accounting sheet will call the report “REPORT 1.” If REPORTS is invoked with the S mode, the REPORT overrides the S option.
1-106 XEROX 4050/4090/4450/4650 LPS COMMAND REFERENCE
Examples
Considerations
SYSTEM COMMANDS
If multiple reports are listed in the REPORTS option, all the reports are processed in multiple report mode, except the last report, which is processed in single report mode. Multiple report mode allows all reports in all files to be processed continuously. Processing automatically moves from report to report, file to file, and volume to volume.
copies
Prints a specified number of copies of a report. Overrides the value specified in the job descriptor entry and any DJDE commands.
r
1
,r
2
...
Specifies the sequence of 1 to 14 reports to be processed.
Only reports specified are printed. r
1 and r
2
are numeric values or ranges of values representing the print order of reports. A range is specified as n-m, where n and m are the first and last reports in the range, respectively. For example, entering REPORTS: 6,1-3,5,4 causes the sixth report to print first, followed by the first through third, followed by the fifth and then the fourth. If the job contains more than 6 reports, they would not be processed. The REPORTS option is also useful for printing one report of a multiple report tape. This saves the step of spacing over reports not needed. Refer to the SPACE command for more information.
document-name
Specifies the name of the file created by the HIP CHANGE command.
START J12,H2SYS
This command starts a print job using the H2SYS job descriptor library and the job descriptor entry J12. It runs in multiple report mode (by default) and prints the number of copies as specified in the J12 job descriptor entry. The job descriptor library, H2SYS, must reside in the JDL directory.
START J12,H2SYS,,5
This command is the same as in example 1 with the exception that five copies are requested. The value of 5 entered for copies overrides the value specified in the J12 job descriptor entry. Note that a comma replaces the unspecified mode option; therefore, the default mode, multiple report, takes effect.
START
No options are specified, so the START command defaults take effect. The default for the job descriptor library is
DFAULT, which must exist in the JDL directory. The job descriptor entry used is DFLT, which must exist in the
DFAULT JDL. The command START,DFAULT has the same effect.
START J12,H2SYS,,2,REPORTS:3-4
This command reprints two copies of the third and fourth reports on the data tape.
START, ONLINE,,,FORM=GBAR
This command processes online data according to the DFLT
JDE in the online .JDL file, using the GBAR form.
The REPORTS option is available only for offline jobs. If you are running an online job, you must enter a comma (,) as a place holder for the S or M in the START command.
XEROX 4050/4090/4450/4650 LPS COMMAND REFERENCE 1-107
SYSTEM COMMANDS
1-108
START parameter options are positional and must be separated by commas. You must enter a comma to replace a parameter that is not specified.
The START options override those specified in the job descriptor library. Figure 1-15 lists details on override parameter options.
If a specified font or form file fails a validity check during input, the system aborts the job and displays the following messages:
OS8852 INVALID FONT FILE HEADER or
OS8855 INVALID FORM FILE HEADER
.
When HIP submitted jobs are running, the START command is not allowed. When tape or disk jobs are running, the START command is allowed.
Figure 1-15. Hierarchy of replacement
Highest order DJDE RECORDS*
TAPE LABEL
START COMMAND*
JDE/JOB COMMAND SET
CATALOG COMMAND SET
JDL/SYSTEM COMMAND SET
OSS DEFAULTS
Parameter options introduced at a higher level override those at lowest level
Lowest order
*EXCEPTION: The copies option on the START command overrides DJDE COPIES from the input data stream.
Syntax
Parameter options
START — print a tape dump
Prints a dump of the tape. You can also use this command to print a file created by the COMPRESS command.
START n,DUMP
n=1
Indicates a H6000 BCD tape (OCTAL dump).
n=2
Indicates an EBCDIC tape (HEX dump).
n=3
Indicates an ASCII tape (HEX dump).
n=4
Indicates an H2000 BCD tape (OCTAL dump).
n=5
Indicates an IBM BCD tape (OCTAL dump).
n=6
Indicates a UNIVAC tape (OCTAL dump).
XEROX 4050/4090/4450/4650 LPS COMMAND REFERENCE
SYSTEM COMMANDS
Syntax
Parameter
Logon levels
Syntax
Parameter options
Considerations
STITCH
Automatically staples a document with 2 to 50 pages. The printer staples portrait sheets in the upper left corner. The printer staples landscape sheets in the upper right corner.
STITCH state state
ON
Enables stapling.
OFF
Overrides the job and turns off the stapling until the end of job or until a STITCH ON command.
The logon levels are 1 through 5.
STOP
Suspends input and/or output processing. The system can process input for one job and output for another job since input and output are controlled separately. Stopping input suspends the processing of input data, but allows output to continue.
Stopping output suspends printing after cycling out the paper path, but allows processing of input data to continue.
STOP value no parameter
Stops input and output processing and the QM scheduling activity until you enter CONTINUE.
value
I
Suspends input activities until you restart them with
CONTINUE I .
O
Suspends output activities until you restart them with
CONTINUE O.
Q
Suspends the QM. The QM does not reschedule reports until you restart it with CONTINUE Q.
If you enter STOP without an operand, the QM input and output activities are suspended.
SUBSTITUTE
Identifies the tape or cartridge drive and assigns it to the TAPE or
CARTRIDGE keyword.
The following system commands automatically work with the drives currently associated with the TAPE keyword: DSR, IFU
TAPE, MOVE, REWIND, SFS, SPACE, SST, TAPE (editor command), and COPY (editor command).
The following system commands accept the CAR keyword in the command line to specify the tape or cartridge device assigned to the CAR keyword: DSR, IFU TAPE, TAPE (editor command), and
COPY (editor command).
XEROX 4050/4090/4450/4650 LPS COMMAND REFERENCE 1-109
SYSTEM COMMANDS
1-110
Syntax
Logon levels
Syntax
Logon levels
Syntax
Logon level
Parameters
SUBSTITUTE DEVICE
Identifies the tape or cartridge drive which is currently associated with the TAPE and CARTRIDGE keywords.
SUBSTITUTE device
The logon levels are 1 through 5.
SUBSTITUTE DEVICE DEFAULT
Assigns the TAPE or CAR keyword to the default physical tape device (CTS for CARTRIDGE and REEL for TAPE).
SUBSTITUTE DEVICE DEFAULT
The logon levels are 1 through 5.
SUBSTITUTE DEVICE physical-device
Displays information about a specific device.
SUBSTITUTE DEVICE physical device
The logon levels are 1 through 5.
physical device
Displays information about the physical device you specify.
You can specify one of the following:
SREEL
9 track, open-reel tape drive (SCSI) mounted in the peripheral cabinet.
MREEL
9 track, open-reel tape drive (MTA) mounted in the cabinet that is usually placed on top of the system controller cabinet.
REEL
This parameter allows the system to pick whichever open-reel tape drive is installed on your system.
SCTS
1/4 inch cartridge tape drive (SCSI).
SFCTS
1/2 inch, 3480-compatible, cartridge tape drive (SCSI).
MFCTS
For the 4850 only, the 1/2 inch, 3480-compatible, cartridge tape drive mounted in the 180-CTS Cartridge
Tape System (MTA).
CTS
This parameter allows the system to pick whichever cartridge tape drive is installed on your system.
Due to the long power-up/initialization period of the 3480 cartridge tape drive, this device is always considered present, regardless of the true system configuration. Thus, any
SUBSTITUTE DEVICE assignment involving the SFCTS physical name will be accepted, even if this tape drive is not physically present.
XEROX 4050/4090/4450/4650 LPS COMMAND REFERENCE
Syntax
Parameters
Logon level
Example
Restriction
SYSTEM COMMANDS
An example of such a tape command is SUB DEV SFCTS FOR
CAR. If you attempt to access and use this drive (such as with the command COP CAR REA LAB XYS.FNT), you are informed that the device is offline. In this situation, this offline message indicates that the device does not exist.
SUBSTITUTE DEVICE physical-device FOR keyword
Assigns a specific physical device to the TAPE or CARTRIDGE keyword.
System boots, updates, or mini-sysgens do not reset TAPE and
CARTRIDGE physical device assignments. A full sysgen with disk format resets SUBSTITUTE DEVICE assignments to their defaults.
SUBSTITUTE DEVICE [physical-device] FOR [keyword] physical-device
Associates the keyword with the physical device you specify.
Refer to the preceding section for a description of the physical devices available.
keyword
The following keywords are available:
TAPE
Specifies the device assigned to the TAPE keyword.
CARTRIDGE
Specifies the device assigned to the CAR keyword.
The logon levels are 1 through 5.
SUB DEV REEL FOR TAPE
Assigns the physical device for REEL to the keyword TAPE.
You can change device assignments only when the LPS is idle.
Device names
If the LPS has only one 9-track tape, one cartridge tape, or one of each, use the general names in table 1-22.
Table 1-22.
General physical device names
General names
CTS
REEL
Devices
Any cartridge tape 18-track 3480 cartridge, if only one is installed on the system.
Any single 9-track tape, if only one is installed on the system.
XEROX 4050/4090/4450/4650 LPS COMMAND REFERENCE 1-111
SYSTEM COMMANDS
Examples
Considerations
If the LPS has two or more 9-track tapes or two or more cartridge tapes, use the specific names in table 1-23.
Table 1-23.
Specific physical device names
Specific names
MREEL
SREEL
FCTS
MFCTS
SFCTS
Devices
Upright 9-track tape (MTA interface)
Front load, reel-to-reel (P-CAB)
18-track cartridge (if only one 18-track on
LPS)
Upright 18-track cartridge (180 CTS or
MTA interface)
3480 cartridge (P-CAB)
Table 1-24 lists the device keywords used with this command.
Table 1-24.
Device keywords
Specific names Devices
TAPE
CARTRIDGE
Default keyword used by LPS applications
(for example, Editor, DSR, IFU, offline print jobs) when the keyword is omitted.
Keyword used by LPS applications (for example, Editor, DSR, IFU, offline print jobs) when CAR is specified in the command line.
When you issue the following SUBSTITUTE DEVICE commands, the subsequent commands function as described:
SUB DEV REEL for TAPE
Assigns the physical device for REEL to the keyword TAPE.
SUB DEV
Displays the current SUB DEV assignments for the keywords
TAPE and CARTRIDGE.
DSR or DSR TAPE
Saves disk files to the physical device assigned to the keyword TAPE.
COP CAR WRI LAB TMP
Writes files to the physical device assigned to the keyword
CARTRIDGE.
STA 2UP,RSX
Prints using the physical device assigned to the keyword
TAPE.
You can change device assignments only when the LPS is idle.
1-112 XEROX 4050/4090/4450/4650 LPS COMMAND REFERENCE
SYSTEM COMMANDS
Syntax
Parameter options
Logon levels
Default
Syntax
Parameter options
Logon levels
Default
TAPE or CARTRIDGE FIND
Positions the tape or cartridge preceding the label record of the file. You can then issue commands to manipulate this file.
medium FIND,file-id medium
TAPE or CARTRIDGE
Specifies the device assigned to the TAPE or CARTRIDGE keyword using the SUB DEV command.
file-id
Positions an LPS-labeled tape or cartridge at the specified file.
The logon levels are 1 through 5.
TAPE is the medium default.
TAPE or CARTRIDGE LIST
Creates a disk file of file-names and sorts them alphabetically.
You can also add leading or trailing strings to facilitate future command file manipulation of that tape or cartridge.
medium LIST,PRINT /SORT,keyword,leading string,trailing string medium
TAPE or CARTRIDGE
Specifies the device assigned to the TAPE or CAR keyword using the SUB DEV command.
Lists the file-ids of the labeled tape, beginning at the current tape position. If you omit this parameter, the tape directory displays.
/SORT
Alphabetically sorts a list of file names of the files on tape.
Up to 3,600 file names can be sorted. When this limit is reached, the message
FILE/LIST TOO LONG, ONLY FIRST 3600
FILE NAMES WILL BE SORTED
. is displayed. Sort by file types for large disk or tape volumes.
keyword
/file-name.file-type
Specifies the file, created on disk, which contains a record for each file listed in the following order: Lead str
file-id Trailstr. The default file-type is .TMP.
filename.filetype
Specifies the file created on disk that contains the alphabetically sorted list of tape files.
leading string
Character string (except commas) that is added before each
file-name in the list that is created.
trailing string
Character string (except commas) appended to each file-
name in the list that is created. The total number of leading and trailing characters cannot be greater than 50.
The logon levels are 1 through 5.
The default file-type is .TMP and the default medium is TAPE.
XEROX 4050/4090/4450/4650 LPS COMMAND REFERENCE 1-113
SYSTEM COMMANDS
Example TAPE LIST,PRINT /SORT, *.FRM FRMFIL.LST
This command creates a file called “FRMFIL.LST” which lists all the .FRM files on the mounted tape. The file names in
FRMFIL.LST are sorted in alphabetical order, and FRMFIL.LST is printed. If the screen display of the sorted records is interrupted during a pause by the X command, then the created file
“FRMFIL.LST” lists only the displayed file names.
Listing begins at the current tape position and continues to the end of the tape. (The listing may be stopped by entering the X command when the pause occurs on the display.) If the PRINT option is specified, the operator is asked to enter a tape volume
ID. The ID can be 0 to 30 characters. If more than 30 characters are entered, only the first 30 characters are used. The following title line appears on each page of the printed listing:
TAPE DIRECTORY date time TAPE ID: id string
The following header line precedes the tape file information on both the screen and printed listings:
FILE NO. FILE NAME FILE SIZE - BF - DATE
FILE NO.
Decimal number that indicates the numerical position of the file on the tape.
FILE NAME
The file-id.
FILE SIZE
Number of 512-byte disk sectors.
- BF -
Number of 512-byte disk sectors in 1 tape block.
DATE
Date the file was written to tape.
If a valid tape label cannot be found, a number appears in the
FILE
NO
. field, but the other fields are blank. This is the case when listing a system software tape (SST). The first two files of the SST do not have labels. A string of asterisks appearing in the date field means that no date was specified in the label or that it could not be converted properly.
To print the file, exit from the editor (using the END command).
You may spool editor print files. The current working storage file is intact if you reenter the editor after the file is printed. The listing is in portrait mode.
TAPE or CARTRIDGE NEXT
Syntax
Parameter options
Default
Logon level
Identifies the next file on the tape or cartridge, and positions the tape or cartridge for manipulating that file.
medium NEXT medium
TAPE or CARTRIDGE
Specifies the device assigned to the TAPE or CAR keyword using the SUB DEV command.
TAPE
The logon levels are 1 through 5.
1-114 XEROX 4050/4090/4450/4650 LPS COMMAND REFERENCE
Considerations
Syntax
Parameter options
Default
Logon level
Considerations
Syntax
Parameter options
Logon level
Default
Syntax
Parameter options
Logon level
Default
Syntax
SYSTEM COMMANDS
The system ignores another NEXT command until it executes another TAPE command.
TAPE or CARTRIDGE REWIND
Rewinds a tape or cartridge to the beginning.
medium REWIND medium
TAPE or CARTRIDGE
Specifies the labeled tape or cartridge assigned to the
TAPE or CAR keyword using the SUB DEV command.
TAPE
The logon levels are 1 through 5.
Use REWIND rather than TAPE or CARTRIDGE REWIND after issuing a MOVE command. Using the TAPE or CARTRIDGE
REWIND command after MOVE can result in the erroneous and misleading message
Tape went offline during operation
.
TAPE or CARTRIDGE SKIP
Positions the tape or cartridge after the specified number of files.
medium SKIPn medium
TAPE or CARTRIDGE
Specifies the device assigned to the TAPE or CAR keyword using the SUB DEV command.
n
A positive integer which specifies the number of tape marks the tape or cartridge is past.
The logon levels are 1 through 5.
TAPE
TAPE or CARTRIDGE UNLOAD
Unloads the tape or cartridge after rewinding it.
medium UNLOAD medium
TAPE or CARTRIDGE
Specifies the labeled tape or cartridge assigned to the
TAPE or CAR keyword using the SUB DEV command.
The logon levels are 1 trough 5.
TAPE
TAPE or CARTRIDGE VOLINIT
Initializes a tape or cartridge in the Xerox labeled format and specifies the data recording density.
medium VOLINIT,value
XEROX 4050/4090/4450/4650 LPS COMMAND REFERENCE 1-115
SYSTEM COMMANDS
Parameter options
Logon level
Default medium
TAPE or CARTRIDGE
Specifies the device assigned to the TAPE or CAR keyword using the SUB DEV command.
value
Initializes the tape or cartridge at 1600 or 6250 bpi.
The logon levels are 1 through 5.
TAPE
TIME
Syntax
Parameter options
Logon level
Default
Example
Verifies the time and date maintained by the system, or turns the display on and off. (Some nonprint tasks turn this display off during processing, but turn it back on when completed.) If you do specify a parameter, the current date, time, and system status display continually in the upper right corner of the system controller display.
TIME state state
ON
Turns the display on and keeps it updated.
OFF
Turns the display off.
The logon levels are 1 through 5.
Time is ON when the system is first powered on or rebooted.
The time and status display has one to five lines of information, each consisting of two spaces and eight characters of status information. Figure 1-16 shows the display format.
Figure 1-16.
Time and status display
..hh:mm:ss
..IiiiOooo
..HostStat
The first line is always the current time of day. The second line reflects the status of input and output processing if they are processing; otherwise, this line is blank. The third line reflects the status of the remote input source if the system has one and it is active; otherwise, this line is blank. The second and third line(s) are displayed only if necessary. Table 1-25 lists the various statuses for input, output, and remote input.
1-116 XEROX 4050/4090/4450/4650 LPS COMMAND REFERENCE
Iiii
WAIT
TAPE
DISK
HOST
HIP
Oooo
WAIT
JAM
PRsd
IDLE
Host
HOST
XNS
871
XPAF
Stat
OFFL
NRDY
WAIT
RECV
SEND
SPND
ONLP
SESN
SYSTEM COMMANDS
Table 1-25.
Status display information
Input status
Waiting for a job.
Processing a tape job.
Processing a disk job.
Processing an online job.
Processing a HIP job.
Output status
Waiting for a job.
Printer jammed and must be cleared.
Actively printing: source and destination are indicated by “sd.”
Neither input nor output processing is active.
Remote source
IBM online host
Ethernet host
871-CM host
XPAF host
Remote source status
No communication between host and LPS.
Communication established but LPS not ready to receive data or commands from host.
LPS ready and waiting for data or commands from host.
LPS actively receiving data or commands from host.
Host actively sending data or commands to LPS.
LPS has suspended communication with the host.
LPS pending receipt from host.
Active XNS session.
If the remote source is a host computer and the printer needs your intervention, the host is notified, and the third line is replaced by the message:
A T T N
.
If your LPS uses the HIP and the IBM 3211 online channel interface concurrently, the time and status display in the upper right corner of the screen may not always be correct. The third line of this display indicates the selected remote interface and its current status. When both interfaces are active, they are both updating the same status fields, and only the most recent update will be seen. As a result, the displayed current host may be, and may remain, incorrect. The current status will continue to display the most recent status change of whichever interfaces are active.
XEROX 4050/4090/4450/4650 LPS COMMAND REFERENCE 1-117
SYSTEM COMMANDS
TYPE
Syntax
Parameter options
Logon level
Displays a source file without editing the file.
TYPE disk-id file-id disk-id
Identifies the system disk (DP0:, DP1:, DP2:, or DP3:) which contains the FILE-ID to be displayed.
file-id
Specifies the file name file-name.file-type.
To view a file in the system, you must have an appropriate level of access.
The logon levels are 1 through 5.
1-118 XEROX 4050/4090/4450/4650 LPS COMMAND REFERENCE
2.
Editor commands
This section describes the text file editing conventions and commands available for the Xerox 4050/4090/4450/4650 Laser
Printing Systems.
LPS editor
Starting an editing session
Line numbers in source files
Editing operations you can perform
Edit changes made to .TMP files
The Laser Printing System (LPS) editor is a utility which provides file editing facilities as part of normal operator communication and control. These facilities are available for the creation, modification, and maintenance of files when the system is idle.
The editor has commands for creating and modifying source files
(JSL, FSL) as well as commands for the maintenance of any type of system disk file.
You enter EDIT to invoke the editor and begin an editing session. The system displays the
EDIT>
prompt when you are working in the editor.
Each source file has line numbers associated with its data records. These numbers allow you to access and perform editing operations on each line of the source file. If you are downloading source files from a host computer through
HOSTCOPY, you must use the MERGE command described in this chapter to add line numbers. The editor automatically adds line numbers to all other types of source files.
You enter single string commands to do the following:
• Create a sequenced source file
• Insert, reorder, and replace lines of text
• Selectively print and display files
• Reorder and renumber records within a file
• Merge part of one file into another
• Match, move, and substitute character strings within a specified range of text lines
• Copy, rename, and delete files.
When you modify a file, you make changes to a temporary file in working storage, not to the permanent file on a system disk.
When a request is made to edit an existing file, the specified file is copied into working storage. The system saves these working files from one editor session to another, but any intervening use of the editor is likely to destroy file contents. If you want to save a working file permanently, you must use the SAVE command.
XEROX 4050/4090/4450/4650 LPS COMMAND REFERENCE 2-1
EDITOR COMMANDS
Storing source files
Source file type directories
Non-source file type directories
The system has two to four system disks: DP0: and DP1:, and optionally DP2: and DP3:. To optimize file access, files of a given type are stored on a preferred drive; this is known as file biasing.
The actual biasing scheme varies depending on the number of drives available. For example, source files tend to be stored on
DP3: in a three- or four-disk system. You may, however, store all source files on any system disk by specifying a disk-id. To access a specific system disk when you store files, you specify the diskid in the command (for example, DP0:, DP1:, DP2:, or DP3:). If you do not enter a disk-id, the system transfers the files to or from the appropriate disk.
You can edit source files found in the directories listed in table
2-1.
Table 2–1. Source file type directories
File type
CMD
DAT
FSL
LIB
JSL
MSC
PCH
TMP
Contents
Command file source files
Data files
Form source language files
Utility files
Job source language file
Temporary user files
Patch files
Temporary user files
You cannot edit files found in the directories listed in table 2-2, although you can perform the operations associated with the following commands: LIST, FILE, DELETE, COPY, and RNAME.
2-2 XEROX 4050/4090/4450/4650 LPS COMMAND REFERENCE
Sample editor sessions
EDITOR COMMANDS
Table 2–2. Non-source file type directories
IMG
IPF
IPM
JDL
LGO
LOG
File type
CME
FIS
FNT
FRM
ICT
IDR
OSD
STK
SYS
$Y$
TPF
TSK
TST
XCS
Contents
Copy modification entry object files
Font interchange standard files
Font data files
Form object files
Ink catalog (defined ink data) files
Ink description data files
Digitized graphic image files
Interpress fragment files
Interpress font mapping files
Job descriptor library object files
Logo data files
System integrity log files
OSDS diagnostic files
Stockset files
System data files
System files
Temporary patch files
System task image files
RTEXT object files
Interpress document files
Figures 2-1 through 2-4 illustrate the use of some editor commands. Underlined text represents operator input.
XEROX 4050/4090/4450/4650 LPS COMMAND REFERENCE 2-3
EDITOR COMMANDS
Figure 2–1. Create and save a Job Source Library file (JSL)
0S1000 READY FOR COMMANDS 08:35:00
EDIT
EDIT>INS 10,10
000010 SYSPDL:SYSTEM;
000020 VOLUME HOST=POWERVS,PLABEL=YES;
000030 BLOCK LENGTH=2048;
000040 ACCT USER=(BIN,TRAY);
000050 21:JOB;
0000060 END;
0000070 <ENTER>
EDIT>SAVE SYSPDL.JSL
EDIT>CLEAR
Work file cleared
EDIT>END
OS1000 READY FOR COMMANDS 8:37:30
Figure 2–2. Modify and save a JSL file
EDIT
EDIT>GET SYSPDL.JSL
EDIT>INS 11
000011 /*SYS JDL*/
000012 <ENTER>
EDIT>FIND 10-60/JOB/
000050 21:JOB;
EDIT>S/JOB/JDE
000050 21:JDE;
EDIT>DIS 40
ACCT USER=(BIN,TRAY);...000040
EDIT>REMOVE 40
1 Records deleted
EDIT>SAVE
EDIT>DISPLAY
<displays working file>
EDIT>CLEAR
Work file cleared
EDIT>END
2-4 XEROX 4050/4090/4450/4650 LPS COMMAND REFERENCE
EDITOR COMMANDS
Figure 2–3. Print a JSL file
OS1000 READY FOR COMMANDS 08:35:00
Edit
Editor version I04
Edit>GET TSTSYS.JSL
Edit>PRINT
Print Job queued, must exit to print
Edit>CE
Work file cleared
0S1010 Starting job 00003
OS1000 READY FOR COMMANDS 08:36:00
OS1020 Job 00003 has completed input phase
OS0020 Resuming OUTPUT
OS1030 Job 00003 has completed printing
OS1000 READY FOR COMMANDS 8:36:30
Figure 2–4. Copy, list, and delete JSL files
OS1000 READY FOR COMMANDS 08:35:00
EDIT
Editor version I04
EDIT>COPY SYSPDL.JSL TSTSYS.JSL
Creating file TSTSYS.JSL
EDIT>FILE JSL
<THE SYSTEM LISTS ALL THE FILES IN THE JSL DIRECTORY>
EDIT>
EDIT>DELETE SYSPDL.JSL
SYSPDL.JSL Deleted
EDIT>END
Conventions
Commands
Character strings
The following conventions apply to the editor commands:
With the exception of composite commands such as SCE, you can enter all commands in full or with the first three characters only. For example, you can enter RENUMBER or REN.
Always enter composite commands in full.
Press <ENTER> to submit each command for execution.
Source file names should contain only uppercase letters A through Z, and numbers 0 through 9.
Split character strings longer than 80 characters as follows:
• Use the ampersand character (&) to indicate the character string continues in the next record.
• Use the syntax of the character string to indicate that it continues in the next record.
XEROX 4050/4090/4450/4650 LPS COMMAND REFERENCE 2-5
EDITOR COMMANDS
Examples
Masking
File id
Disk id
Syntax variations
‘XEROX.PICTORIAL.RED’ 00010
Ink name within one record:
‘XEROX.PICTORIAL.
RED’
00010
00020
Ink name within two records using string syntax (a period) to continue the string.
‘XEROX.PICTORIAL.&
RED’
00010
00020 or
‘XEROX'PICTORIAL.&
RED’
00010
00020 or
‘XEROX.PICTOR& 00010
IAL.RED’ 00020
Ink name within two records using an ampersand to continue the string.
When you specify the file id in file maintenance commands, you can use the masking feature unless otherwise noted. With masking, you use an asterisk (*) or question mark (?) as a wildcard or string lookup for the file name. The asterisk makes single and multiple alphanumeric characters, even a blank, a match. The question mark makes only single alphanumeric characters, including a blank, a match.
The file id refers to the name of a file and the file directory in which it is cataloged. Thus, when specifying a file id, you must key in file-name.file-type. File-name is a one- to six-character file name. File-type is one of the file directories under which the file name is cataloged. For example, SIGMA.JSL would be the file id of the file named SIGMA, which is cataloged in the JSL file directory.
The disk id refers to one of two to four system disks, which are defined as DP0:, DP1:, DP2:, or DP3:. File manipulation editor commands which do not specify a disk number transfer the files to or from appropriate disk according to file type. You can direct access to or from a specific disk.
When n-m is used in the command syntax, the following usage is implied: n-m
Specifies starting and ending line numbers.
n
Specifies one line number.
n-
Specifies line number to the end of the file.
-m
Specifies beginning of the file to the identified line number.
The highest valid line number is 32,765. The maximum number of file records (lines) is 5000.
2-6 XEROX 4050/4090/4450/4650 LPS COMMAND REFERENCE
EDITOR COMMANDS
Command summary
Command
C
CE
CLEAR
CONVERT
COPY
D
DELETE
DISPLAY
DUPLICATE
EDIT
END
F
FID
FILE
FIND
FLOPPY
GET
GPCE
INSERT
KEYS
LIST
MERGE
MODIFY
MOVE
NOCONVERT
O
P
PCE
REMOVE
RENUMBER
REPLACE
REVIEW
RNAME
Table 2-3 gives a complete listing of the text file editing conventions for the Xerox 4050/4090/4450/4650 LPS.
Table 2-3.
Editor commands
Function
Changes the specified character string into another string.
Combines the commands CLEAR, END. CE is a composite command and cannot be abbreviated.
Clears the contents of the working file.
Enables the use of the pound sign (#) to alter capitalization.
Copies files from disk/disk to disk/tape or cartridge.
Deletes a string.
Deletes files from system disk.
Displays source lines in the text work area on the LPS console monitor.
Duplicates lines from a file into another area of the file.
Begins an editing session.
Ends an editing session.
Inserts a new string following a specified string.
Creates a prototype command file.
Lists file directories on the LPS display.
Finds and displays lines containing a specified text string.
Initiates floppy disk utility commands.
Copies an existing file into the text work area.
Combines the commands GET, PRINT, CLEAR, and END. GPCE is a composite command and cannot be abbreviated.
Inserts lines using a specified line number.
Displays beginning and ending line numbers of the file in the text work area.
Lists a hardcopy of file directories.
Appends an existing file to the current contents of the text work area.
Specifies a range of lines for intrarecord commands.
Moves lines from one place to another.
Disables the use of the pound sign (#) to alter capitalization.
Overlays an existing string by specified string.
Inserts a new string prior to specified string.
Abbreviates the commands PRINT, CLEAR, and END.
Prints all or specified lines of the working file to the sample or output tray.
Deletes a specified group of lines.
Renumbers the lines in the working file.
Substitutes the specified existing lines with specified new lines.
Reviews file directories with optional delete.
Renames a file from one file name to another.
XEROX 4050/4090/4450/4650 LPS COMMAND REFERENCE 2-7
EDITOR COMMANDS
Table 2-3.
Editor commands (continued)
Command
S
SAVE
SCE
SORT
Function
Substitutes an existing string with a specified string.
Saves the contents of working storage as a disk file.
Combines the commands SAVE, CLEAR, and END. SCE is a composite command and cannot be abbreviated.
Alphabetizes the records in the current file already created by the FID command.
Displays the next record in the file and specifies that it will be modified.
Controls the writing of tape marks between files for LPS labeled and unlabeled tapes and cartridges.
STEP
TAPE or
CARTRIDGE EOF or NOEOF or
ENDFILE
TAPE or
CARTRIDGE
FIND
TAPE or
CARTRIDGE LIST
TAPE or
CARTRIDGE
NEXT
TAPE or
CARTRIDGE
REWIND
TAPE or
CARTRIDGE SKIP
TAPE or
CARTRIDGE
UNLOAD
TAPE or
CARTRIDGE
VOLINIT
TYPE
Positions the tape or cartridge preceding the label record of the file.
Creates a file of file names on a tape or cartridge and sorts the names alphabetically.
Identifies the next file on the tape or cartridge and positions the tape or cartridge for manipulating that file.
Rewinds a tape or cartridge to the beginning.
Positions the tape or cartridge after the specified number of files.
Unloads the tape or cartridge after rewinding it.
Initializes a tape or cartridge in the Xerox labeled format and specifies the data recording density.
Displays a source file.
2-8 XEROX 4050/4090/4450/4650 LPS COMMAND REFERENCE
EDITOR COMMANDS
Commands
Syntax
Parameter options
Default
Syntax
Logon level
Syntax
Logon level
Examples
You must invoke the editor to access the editor commands.
Refer to the EDIT command for more information. The editor commands appear in alphabetical order.
C
Changes the specified character string into another string.
C n/string
1
/string
2
/ n
Indicates that the nth occurrence of the character string in each line is to be affected. (n=0 indicates that all occurrences of the specified character string are to be affected.) When you specify n, you must precede it with one blank character. You can also use a dollar sign ($), period (.), or a single quote (‘) instead of the slash (/).
string
1
Indicates the string you want to change.
string
2
Indicates the new string that replaces string
1
.
The default for n is the first occurrence of the specified character string. This command is used with the MODIFY command.
CE
Removes all data lines from the working file and terminates the editing session. Refer to the CLEAR and END commands for further information.
CE
The logon levels are 1 through 5.
CLEAR
Erases all records.
CLEAR
The logon levels are 1 through 5.
EDIT>
CLEAR
Clear working storage.
EDIT>
INSERT 10,10
Issue next command.
XEROX 4050/4090/4450/4650 LPS COMMAND REFERENCE 2-9
EDITOR COMMANDS
CONVERT
COPY
Syntax
Logon level
Example
Prepares to edit files transferred from other Xerox laser printing systems with uppercase-only keyboards. You can edit files containing lowercase characters using the uppercase keyboard.
To insert or reference lowercase characters in a file, precede and follow the lowercase characters with the pound sign (#). The pound sign indicates the start and the end of conversion to lowercase characters. Use the NOCONVERT command to make the pound sign a character again instead of a toggle.
CONVERT
The logon levels are 1 through 5.
The CONVERT command alters capitalization in the text line:
This is the end
.
EDIT>
CONVERT
EDIT>
MOD 10
THIS IS THE END
EDIT>
S/T#HIS/T#HAT/
THAT IS THE END
EDIT>
NOCONVERT
Syntax
Logon level
Example
Considerations
Copies files from:
• System disk to system disk
• System disk to floppy disk, cartridge, or tape
• Floppy disk, cartridge, or tape to system disk.
You can initiate a copy operation either from the editor or at the system level. For complete information on COPY, refer to the
COPY command in the “System commands” chapter.
Refer to the COPY command in the “System commands” section.
The logon levels are 1 through 5.
The following example illustrates a copy operation from disk to disk:
EDIT>
COPY FORMA.FSL FORMX
>Creating file FORMX.FSL
The following example illustrates a copy operation from an unlabeled tape to disk:
EDIT>
COPY TAPE UNSYS.JSL
The following example illustrates a copy operation from a labeled tape to disk:
EDIT>
COPY TAPE LABEL OCRA.FNT
The following example illustrates a copy operation from disk to an unlabeled tape:
EDIT>
COPY TAPE WRITE EBCDIC FORMX.FSL
Masking cannot be used with this operation.
2-10 XEROX 4050/4090/4450/4650 LPS COMMAND REFERENCE
EDITOR COMMANDS
Syntax
Parameter options
Logon level
Default
Examples
Syntax
Parameter options
Logon level
Example
Considerations
D
Deletes a string from one or more records in the working storage file.
D n/string/ n
Where n indicates that the nth occurrence of the string in each line is to be affected (n =0 indicates that all occurrences of the specified string are to be affected).
When n is specified, it must be preceded by one blank character. A string is deleted from lines specified in the
MODIFY command. In addition to the slash (/), a dollar sign
($), a period (.), or single quote (') may be used as an intrarecord command delimiter.
string
Indicates the string you want to change.
The logon levels are 1 through 5.
The default value is 1.
EDIT>
MODIFY 5
EDIT>
D/SYSTEM/
Displays the line you want to modify and specifies deleting the first occurrence of SYSTEM from line 5.
EDIT>
MOD 5-70
EDIT>
D 0/JDE/
Specifies deleting all occurrences (such as n=0) of JDE from each line, starting with line 5 and proceeding through line
70. If n were set to 2 (instead of 0), the second occurrence of JDE in each line (if any) would be deleted.
DELETE
Deletes a file from a system disk. You can initiate DELETE either from the editor or at the system level.
DELETE disk-idfile-id,file-id,...,file-id disk-id
Specifies the system disk (DP0:, DP1:, DP2:, or DP3:) which contains the file to be deleted.
file-id
Specifies the file as filename.filetype.
file-id,...,file-id
Specifies multiple files.
The logon levels are 1 through 5.
EDIT>
DELETE UNIVAC.JSL, FORMX.FSL
UNIVAC.JSL. DELETED
FORMX.FSL DELETED
EDIT>
Never delete system (.SYS) files, in particular PRFIL1SYS.
Masking cannot be used with this operation.
This command can be restricted to any logon level with the RCU command.
XEROX 4050/4090/4450/4650 LPS COMMAND REFERENCE 2-11
EDITOR COMMANDS
DISPLAY
DUPLICATE
2-12
Syntax
Parameter
Logon level
Examples
Considerations
Displays a listing of all lines or selected lines of the current working storage file.
DISPLAY n-m n-m
Specifies starting and ending line numbers.
The logon levels are 1 through 5.
The following examples show how to use the DISPLAY command:
EDIT>
DISPLAY
Displays all lines.
EDIT>
DISPLAY 10-20
Displays lines 10 through 20.
EDIT>
DIS 5-
Displays line 5.
EDIT>
DIS -100
Display lines from the beginning of the file through line 100.
EDIT>
DIS - 100 - 125
Displays lines from the beginning of the file through 100.
Ignores the ‘-125’.
EDIT>
DISPLAY 50-
Displays lines 50 through the end of the file.
Masking does not apply to this operation.
Syntax
Logon level
Parameter options
Default
Considerations
Example
Copies a line or group of lines to another point in the file and is similar to the MOVE command, except that original lines are not deleted from the file.
DUPLICATE n-m,p,s
The logon levels are 1 through 5.
n
Specifies one line number.
-m
Specifies beginning of the file to the identified line number.
The highest valid line number is 32,765. The maximum number of file records (lines) is 5000.
p
Moves specified lines to a new location, starting with line number p.
s
Specifies new line numbers in increments of s.
The default value for s is 1.
Masking does not apply to this operation.
EDIT>
DUP 10-30,1000,3
Duplicates lines 10 through 30 to 1000, 1003, 1006.
XEROX 4050/4090/4450/4650 LPS COMMAND REFERENCE
EDITOR COMMANDS
Syntax
Parameter options
Logon level
Example
Syntax
Logon level
Syntax
Parameter options
Creates a source file, accesses a source file, or executes a file.
When you invoke the editor, it prompts you by displaying
EDIT
>. If you do not enter a parameter, this command creates an empty source file ready for input.
EDIT disk-id file-name.file-type or @file-name.file-type disk-id
Refers to the system disk (DP0:, DP1:, DP2:, or DP3:) on which the file resides.
file-name
Identifies a one- to six-character disk file.
file-type
Specifies the file directory under which the file name is cataloged.
@file-name
Specifies that the editor is to retrieve commands from an editor command file. If no file type is entered, the system defaults to CMD.
You specify the file (without the @) if the file is put into working storage.
The logon levels are 1 through 5.
OS1000 READY FOR COMMANDS (TIME) HH:MM:SS
EDIT SYSPDL.JSL
(Operator keys in)
EDIT>
(System prompt)
EDIT
END
Terminates the editing session. Control is returned to the system, and no more editor commands are accepted until the editor is requested again. The message
OS1000 READY FOR
COMMANDS
is displayed after the END command takes effect.
END
The logon levels are 1 through 5.
F
Inserts a character string following another character string.
F n/string
1
/string
2
/ n
Where n indicates that the nth occurrence of the string in each line is to be affected (n =0 indicates that all occurrences of the specified string are to be affected).
When n is specified, it must be preceded by one blank character. String is inserted from lines specified in the
MODIFY command. In addition to the slash (/), a dollar sign
($), a period (.), or single quote (') may be used as an intrarecord command delimiter.
XEROX 4050/4090/4450/4650 LPS COMMAND REFERENCE 2-13
EDITOR COMMANDS
FID
FILE
Logon level
Default string
1
Indicates the string you want to change.
string
2
Insert following string
1 command.
for lines specified in the MODIFY
The logon levels are 1 through 5.
The default value is 1.
Syntax
Parameter options
Default
Example
Generates a file consisting of a list of all disk files with the specified file type. You can use this file as a prototype command file because it contains one record for each file of the specified file type.
You can initiate an FID operation either from the editor or at the system level.
FID disk-id file-id file-type disk-id
Refers to the system disk (DP0:, DP1:, DP2:, or DP3:) on which the file resides.
file-id
Names the file to be created. If both the file name and file type are specified, the created file contains only the name of the specified file.
The default extension is .CMD.
file-type
Specifies the file directory.
Each record of the command file consists of a semicolon, a file name, a file type, and an asterisk (for example, ;GBAR.FSL*). You can edit these records to produce a command file which manipulates a subset of a file type (for example, deleting a subset of the current fonts in the FNT directory).
EDIT>
FID JSLIST.TMP
JSL
Generates JSLIST.TMP which contains the name of the JSL FILES directory.
Syntax
Logon level
Displays the file names in the specified disk file directory. You can display specific file-ids within the catalog or the entire catalog.
You can initiate a FILE operation either from the editor or at the system level. For complete information, refer to the FILE command in the “System commands” chapter.
FILE /EXdisk-id file-id,file-id,... disk-id file-id /SORT,
file-name.file-type disk-id file-id/file-name.file-type,leading
string,trailing string
The logon levels are 1 through 5.
2-14 XEROX 4050/4090/4450/4650 LPS COMMAND REFERENCE
Example
Syntax
Logon level
Examples
Considerations
Syntax
EDITOR COMMANDS
EDIT>
FILE DP0: *.SYS/SORT, SYSFIL.LST
This command creates a file called “SYSFIL.LST” which files on the DP0: disk. The filenames in SYSFIL.LST are sorted in alphabetical order, and SYSFIL.LST is displayed on the screen. If the screen display of the sorted records is interrupted, then the created file “SYSFIL.LST” lists only the displayed filenames.
Displays all lines in the specified range which contain the specified string.
FIND n-m/string/
The logon levels are 1 through 5.
The following examples show how to use the FIND command:
EDIT>
FIND /JDE/
Displays each line that contains the characters JDE.
EDIT>
FIN 5-100/JOB/
Displays lines 5 through 100 that have the characters JOB.
EDIT>
FIN 5/SYSTEM/
Displays line 5 if it contains the word SYSTEM.
EDIT>
FIN 5-/SYSTEM/
Displays lines 5 through end-of-file that contain the word
SYSTEM.
EDIT>
FIN -100/JOB/
Displays lines 1 through 100 that have the characters JOB.
Masking does not apply to this operation.
FIND
Initiated from the editor or at the system level. Refer to the
FLOPPY command in the “System commands” chapter for information about the following commands:
• FLOPPY CLEAR
• FLOPPY DELETE
• FLOPPY FCHECK
• FLOPPY FILE
• FLOPPY FORMAT
• FLOPPY LIST
• FLOPPY RESTORE
• FLOPPY SAVE.
FLOPPY
Brings an existing file into the work area. The previous contents of the work area are erased, and the file name is automatically associated with the contents of the work area.
If you enter the SAVE command without a file name, the contents of the work area overwrite the existing file.
GET disk-id file-id
GET
XEROX 4050/4090/4450/4650 LPS COMMAND REFERENCE 2-15
EDITOR COMMANDS
Parameter options
Logon level
Example
Consideration disk-id
Specifies the system disk that contains the file as DP0:, DP1:,
DP2:, or DP3:.
file-id
Specifies the file (by filename.file-type) to move into the work area.
The logon levels are 1 through 5.
OS1000 READY FOR COMMANDS (TIME) HH:MM:SS
EDIT
EDIT>
GET SYS2.JSL
If the file you want to edit is larger than the editor work area, the system does not copy the file.
The GET command clears the work area before moving a file into it.
GPCE
Syntax
Parameter options
Logon level
Restriction
Brings the specified file into working storage to format it for printing all or selected lines of the file, to remove all data lines from the working file, to terminate the editing session, and to deliver a printed report to the sample tray or to a print tray.
Refer to the GET, PRINT, CLEAR, and END commands for further information.
GPCE disk-id file-id n-m disk-id
Specifies the system disk that contains the file as DP0:, DP1:,
DP2:, or DP3:.
file-id
Specifies the file (by filename.file-type) to move into the work area.
n-m
Specifies starting and ending line numbers.
The logon levels are 1 through 5.
You cannot abbreviate this command to the first three characters.
INSERT
Syntax
Logon level
Default
Examples
Adds a line or group of lines into the file.
INSERT n s|n text
Lines are inserted starting at n and incremented by s. Line n must not already exist. The system prompts you with the next sequence number. Terminate input with a null line by pressing
<ENTER> or encountering an existing record.
The logon levels are 1 through 5.
The default value for s is 1.
EDIT>
INSERT 10,10
Insert lines starting at 10 and increment by 10 for next line.
EDIT>
INS 15
Insert lines starting at 15 and increment by 1.
2-16 XEROX 4050/4090/4450/4650 LPS COMMAND REFERENCE
Syntax
Logon level
Example
Syntax
Parameter options
Logon level
Syntax
Logon level
EDITOR COMMANDS
EDIT>
55 ACCT USER=(BIN,TRAY);
Insert text at line 55. The text you enter replaces the existing line contents.
Verifies the beginning and ending line numbers of the working file.
KEYS
The logon levels are 1 through 5.
EDIT>GET SYS2.JSL
EDIT>KEYS
BEGINNING LINE NUMBER 000010
ENDING LINE NUMBER 000050
KEYS
LIST
You can initiate the LIST command from the editor or at the system level. Refer to the “System command” chapter for more information on the LIST command.
MERGE
Inserts a file into working storage where specified, or adds line numbers to source files created on the host computer and downloaded to the printer. An editor message
CANNOT GET, FILE
IMPROPERLY SEQUENCED appears if a file must be merged. The current records in working storage are not destroyed when the records of the new file are brought in.
MERGE disk-id file-id,n,s disk-id
Specifies the system disk (DP0:, DP1:, DP2:, DP3:) that contains the file to be moved into working storage.
n
Specifies the sequence number assigned to the first record of the file being merged with the contents of working storage.
The default is the last line number in the working file +10.
s
The sequence increment. The default is 10.
The logon levels are 1 through 5.
MODIFY
Specifies a range of lines that can be affected by subsequent string modification commands. These lines are displayed after the MODIFY command has been issued. The default for the modify range is the entire file. If you specify a modify range, all records in that range are displayed. The string modification commands are: C, D, F, O, P, and S.
MODIFY n-m
The logon levels are 1 through 5.
XEROX 4050/4090/4450/4650 LPS COMMAND REFERENCE 2-17
EDITOR COMMANDS
MOVE
NOCONVERT
Syntax
Logon level
Default
Considerations
Relocates a line or group of lines to new line positions.
MOVE n-m,p,s
The specified lines (n-m) are moved to a new location starting with line number p. The new line numbers are incremented by s.
Lines n-m are deleted from the file.
The logon levels are 1 through 5.
The default value for s is 1.
Masking does not apply to this operation.
Syntax
Logon level
Toggles off the CONVERT command so that the pound sign (#) does not convert uppercase characters to lowercase characters.
NOCONVERT
The logon levels are 1 through 5.
O
Examples
Considerations
EDIT>
MODIFY 5-100
Prepare to modify lines 5 through 100.
EDIT>
S/JDE/JOB
Substitute occurrences of JDE with JOB in lines 5 through
100.
EDIT>
MOD 5
Prepare to modify line 5.
EDIT>
D/HOST=OSWTR/
Delete text HOST=OSWTR from line 5.
If no match is found in the modify range, the
NO MATCH FOUND message is displayed.
Masking does not apply to this operation.
2-18
Syntax
Parameter options
Logon level
Examples
Erases a character string by overlaying it with a second character string.
O n/string
1
/string
2
/ n
Indicates that the nth occurrence of the string in each line is to be affected. n =0 indicates that all occurrences of the specified string are to be affected. When you specify n, it must be preceded by one blank character.
string
1
/string
2
The nth occurrence of string
1
is overlaid by string
2
for lines specified in the MODIFY command. It is useful for replacing characters that are unknown or that you cannot create from the keyboard.
The logon levels are 1 through 5.
ABCDEFGHxJKLM
Initial string contains a lowercase x which cannot be input through the keyboard.
XEROX 4050/4090/4450/4650 LPS COMMAND REFERENCE
Syntax
Parameter options
Logon level
Logon level
Syntax
Restriction
Syntax
Logon level
EDITOR COMMANDS
EDIT>
O/GH/GHI/
Command.
ABCDEFGHIJKLM
Final string.
P
Inserts one character string prior to another character string.
P n/string
1
/string
2 n
Indicates that the nth occurrence of the string in each line is to be affected. n =0 indicates that all occurrences of the specified string are to be affected. When you specify n, it must be preceded by one blank character.
string
2
Inserts just prior to string
1 command.
for lines specified in the MODIFY
The logon levels are 1 through 5.
PCE
Use this command to format for printing all or selected lines of the working file, to remove all data lines from the working file, to terminate the editing session, and to deliver a printed report to the sample tray or to a print tray.
Refer to the PRINT, CLEAR, and END commands for further information.
The logon levels are 1 through 5.
PCE [n-m]
This command is an abbreviated method of entering three commands: PRINT, CLEAR and END. If either one of the first two commands fails to execute because of an error condition, the system may ignore subsequent commands.
Prints all or selected lines of the current working storage file.
PRINT n-m
To print the file, exit from the editor using the END command.
You can then spool editor print files. The current working storage file is intact if you enter the editor after the file is printed.
The listing is in portrait mode.
The logon levels are 1 through 5.
Three title lines precede the data requested for printing and appear on each logical page. They are illustrated in figure 2-5.
Figure 2-5. Sample title lines
FILE NAME: file-id PRINTED ON: date time
DISK ID: disk id
1.......10........20........30........40.........50........6
XEROX 4050/4090/4450/4650 LPS COMMAND REFERENCE 2-19
EDITOR COMMANDS
REMOVE
RENUMBER
Considerations
The file-id is the file name and file type associated with the current working storage file. If file-id is
** NONE **
, a hardcopy of the data was requested before the data in the working storage file was given a file name. This is possible if the data is a result of a MERGE command used to obtain the data of a file rather than using the GET command, the data is in a new file that has not been saved on the disk using the SAVE command, or the working storage file is restored upon entering the editor from the system prompt .
Masking does not apply to this operation.
Syntax
Parameter
Logon level
Examples
Considerations
Deletes a line or group of lines from the working storage file.
REMOVE n-m n-m
n is always required. If there is a range, m is also required
(such as a hyphen cannot be used to imply the first or last line).
The logon levels are 1 through 5.
EDIT>
REMOVE 5-25
Remove lines 5 through 25.
EDIT>
REM 15
Remove line 15.
You can also erase a line from the working storage file by entering the line number. To delete a group of lines, enter the beginning and ending line numbers separated by a hyphen.
EDIT>
55
Delete line 55.
1 RECORDS DELETED
EDIT>
10-40
Delete lines 10 through 40.
4 RECORDS DELETED
Assuming that line numbers are incremented by 10.
Masking does not apply to this operation.
Syntax
Logon level
Default
Considerations
Renumbers the lines of the working storage file. Renumbering begins with line number n and successive data lines are assigned numbers in increments of s.
RENUMBER n,s
The logon levels are 1 through 5.
The default value for n and s is 10.
Masking does not apply to this operation.
2-20 XEROX 4050/4090/4450/4650 LPS COMMAND REFERENCE
EDITOR COMMANDS
Syntax
Parameters
Examples
Example 1
Example 2
Example 3
REPLACE
Replaces a line or group of lines by the specified lines.
REPLACE n[-m][,s] or n text n-m
n is always required and is the first line to be replaced. If there is a range, m is also required (a hyphen cannot be used to imply the first or last line).
s
Sequence increment. The default is 1.
text
Text you want to enter on the nth line.
For the REPLACE n[-m][,s] command, you can replace the designated line or lines and are allowed to enter data into line n through the next existing line, incremented by s.
For the n text command, you can enter text for the n line, and you will be prompted for the next sequential command line.
For a command file with 10 lines sequenced by 10, replace some lines will be replaced with these two commands:
10 aaaaaaa
20 bbbbbb
30 ccccccc
40 dddddd
50 eeeeee
60 ffffff
70 gggggg
80 hhhhhh
90 iiiiii
100 jjjjjj
EDIT>
REPLACE 20
With this command, you delete the contents of line 20 and are allowed to replace it with new data you would then enter. You would start with line 20 and, at increments of 1, enter data from line 20 through line 29. You are stopped at 29 because 30 would be the next sequential existing line not to be replaced.
EDIT>
REPLACE 30-40
This time you replace lines 30 and 40 with lines 30 through 49 at increments of 1.
Of course, you do not have to use all of the numbers, just the ones you need.
EDIT>
REPLACE 50-80,5
With this command, you delete the contents of lines 50 through
80 and are allowed to replace them with new data you would then enter. You would start with line 50 and, at increments of 5, enter data commands from line 50 through line 85. You are stopped at 85 because 90 would be the next sequential existing line not to be replaced.
XEROX 4050/4090/4450/4650 LPS COMMAND REFERENCE 2-21
EDITOR COMMANDS
REVIEW
RNAME
Example 4
EDIT>100 kkkkkk
With this type of command you are only allowed to replace one line, the one you designated. 100 in this case. It is replaced with the text you entered as kkkkkk. You will then be prompted for command line 101.
Syntax
Parameter options
Logon level
Considerations
Reviews each file in a directory with the option to delete it. The file names display one at a time. You can delete a file by entering D, or exit the display process by entering the X command.
You can initiate a REVIEW operation from either the editor or at the system level.
REVIEW disk-idfile-id,file-id,...
disk-id
Specifies the system disk (DP0:, DP1:, DP2:, DP3:) that contains the specified directory.
file-id
Specifies the file as file-name.file-type. (Masking can be used.)
The logon levels are 1 through 5.
To delete a file from the system, you must have the logon level required.
You cannot delete any file name containing a period or dollar sign. The following message displays:
*PROTECTED*
Any other response (for example, pressing the space bar) saves the file and the next file name being displayed.
Syntax
Parameter options
Logon level
Considerations
Changes the name of a file. You can initiate an RNAME operation from either the editor or the system disk.
RNAME old-file-id new-file-id
If you specify only the file-name, the file type remains the same.
Rename files one at a time.
old-file-id
Specifies the current file-name.
new-file-id
Specifies the file-name.file-type to replace the old-file-id.
The logon levels are 1 through 5.
Masking does not apply to this command.
S
Syntax
Substitutes one character string for another.
S n /string
1
/string
2
/
2-22 XEROX 4050/4090/4450/4650 LPS COMMAND REFERENCE
Parameter options
Logon level
Example
Syntax
Parameter options
Logon level
Syntax
Logon level
EDITOR COMMANDS n
Indicates that the nth occurrence of the string in each line is to be affected. n=0 indicates that all occurrences of the specified string are to be affected. When you specify n, it must be preceded by one blank character.
string
1
Indicates the string you want to change.
string
2
Substitutes for string
1 command
for lines specified in the MODIFY
The logon levels are 1 through 5.
ABCDEFGHXJKLM
EDIT>
S/GHX/GHI/
ABCDEFGHIJKLM
Initial string, command, and final string.
SAVE
Saves the contents of the working storage file (or a subset of it) in permanent file storage.
SAVE file-id n m file-id
If no file-id is specified, the contents of the working storage file are saved under the name currently associated with it (as set by a previous GET command or as set when the editor is called). If no file-id is currently associated with the working storage file, the operator is prompted for a file-id under which to save its contents.
n,m
Saves a set of lines by specifying the starting line number n and the ending line number m. The default for n is the first line number. The default for m is the last line number.
If a file-id is given, and a file already exists with that file-id, the
THE FILE ALREADY EXISTS, DO YOU WANT TO OVERWRITE IT (YES/NO)?
message displays.
If you enter YES, the file is overwritten and its original contents are lost. If you enter NO, the SAVE command is ignored. A message displays if there is insufficient disk space to save a file.
The logon levels are 1 through 5.
SCE (SAVE CLEAR END) saves the contents of the working file (or a subset of it) into permanent file storage, removes all data lines from the working file, and terminates the editing session.
Refer to the SAVE, CLEAR, and END commands for more information.
SCE disk-id file-id n m
The logon levels are 1 through 5.
SCE
XEROX 4050/4090/4450/4650 LPS COMMAND REFERENCE 2-23
EDITOR COMMANDS
SORT
STEP
2-24
Syntax
Logon level
Example
Considerations
Used after you invoke FID from within the editor. FID generates a list of all files of the file type you specified on the system and creates a .CMD file which consists of one record for each file.
Each record is a semicolon followed by the one- to six-character file name, a period, and the file type. (ex: ~7:) You must use
GET to put this .CMD file in the editor work area before you issue the SORT command, since SORT has no optional parameters and operates only on the file in the editor work area.
SORT copies the .CMD file records to a .TMP file, putting them in alphabetical sequence by the sort order of the characters in positions 2 through 7.
As file names typically consist of uppercase letters and numbers, the sort priority used by the SORT command is:
?, A,B,C...Z,0,1,2,...9
where ? is any character which is not an uppercase letter or a number. A lowercase letter or special character is ignored (as are any following characters), and the record is written to the beginning of the file.
If the editor work file is empty when you issue the SORT command, the system displays the message
NOTHING TO SORT.
SORT
The logon levels are 1 through 5.
In the following example, FID creates a file named “FSLFIL.CMD,” listing all the .FSL files on the LPS disks. Next, GET is used to put the FSLFIL.CMD file in the editor working area. Then FSLFIL.CMD
is sorted, creating the FSLFIL.TMP file which is printed or displayed.
EDIT>
FID FSLFIL.CMD FSL
EDIT>
GET FSLFIL.CMD
EDIT>
SORT
EDIT>
PRINT (or DISPLAY)
Masking does not apply to this operation.
Syntax
Logon level
Examples
Displays each record of a file, one at a time, starting with the next record as specified in the MODIFY command.
STEP or <ENTER>
The logon levels are 1 through 5.
EDIT>
MODIFY 10
Sets the modify range.
...line 10 displays...
EDIT>
STEP
...text of next line after line 10 displays...
EDIT>
S/MOST/HOST
Changes the text in the next line after line 10.
...1 strings changed
XEROX 4050/4090/4450/4650 LPS COMMAND REFERENCE
Considerations
Syntax
Parameter options
Logon level
Restrictions
EDITOR COMMANDS
EDIT>
STEP
...next line displays
EDIT>
...
You can enter a record command (such as C, O, S, F, P, or
D) or another STEP.
Pressing the <ENTER> key is an implied STEP command. If there is an active working file, the modify range is stepped as if a
STEP command had been issued. When an attempt is made to step past the last record of the file, the messages
INVALID
SEQUENCE NUMBER and
NO MORE RECORDS are displayed.
Masking does not apply to this operation.
TAPE or CARTRIDGE EOF or NOEOF or ENDFILE
Controls tape mark writing between files for LPS labeled and unlabeled tapes.
KEYWORD option
KEYWORD
TAPE or CARTRIDGE
Specifies the tape or cartridge device assigned to the
TAPE or CAR keyword using the SUB DEV command. If you do not specify CAR, the TAPE keyword is used.
option
NOEOF
Disables the writing of tape marks between files. This command must precede the list of file names to be written to tape.
EOF
Enables the writing of tape marks. This command writes two tape marks and then backs up over one of the tape marks.
ENDFILE
Enables the writing of tape marks. Writes the file
ENDFIL.END and ends the tape with three tape marks. It then backs up over two of the tape marks.
Also concatenates files without tape marks between logical files. For example, you may create a backup tape with all files concatenated into one file (multiple logical files in one physical file), thereby eliminating the need for multiple job steps when executing HOSTCOPY to download these files.
The logon levels are 1 through 5. Available only from the editor.
All files may be copied with TAPE.
If tape mark writing is disabled using NOEOF and you must enable it again using EOF or ENDFILE, the tape will not contain any tape marks to signify the end of the tape. A tape must normally end with two tape marks.
If NOEOF is selected and the end of tape is reached while writing a file, the LPS marks the tape two times in that area, and the last file will be corrupted.
XEROX 4050/4090/4450/4650 LPS COMMAND REFERENCE 2-25
EDITOR COMMANDS
Examples
Recommendation
If tape mark writing is disabled using NOEOF and you must enable it again using EOF or ENDFILE, the tape will not contain any tape marks to signify the end of the tape. A tape must normally end with two tape marks.
In the following example of NOEOF and ENDFILE, three .IMG
files are copied to cartridge with no tape marks written between the .IMG files. TAPE ENDFILE enables the writing of tape marks, writes the ENDFIL.END file to tape, writes three tape marks, and backs up over two of them:
EDIT>
TAPE NOEOF
EDIT>
COPY CAR WRITE LABEL ABC.IMG
EDIT>
COPY CAR WRITE LABEL ABD.IMG
EDIT>
CAR TAPE WRITE LABEL BCD.IMG
EDIT>
CAR ENDFILE
In the following example of NOEOF and EOF, three .IMG files are copied to tape with no tape marks written between the .IMG
files. TAPE EOF writes three tape marks and backs up over two of them:
EDIT>
TAPE NOEOF
EDIT>
COPY TAPE WRITE LABEL ABC.IMG
EDIT>
COPY TAPE WRITE LABEL ABD.IMG
EDIT>
COPY TAPE WRITE LABEL BCD.IMG
EDIT>
TAPE EOF
Use the ENDFILE option to prepare a tape to be used by the
HOSTCOPY command.
For example, you can create a backup tape with all files concatenated into one file (multiple logical files in one physical file), thereby eliminating the need for multiple job steps when executing HOSTCOPY to download these files.
This command is provided for compatibility with the HOSTCOPY procedure, which requires that the end of the last physical file on the tape be identified with a logical file called ENDFIL.END. This file results in the message
END OF TAPE FOUND. IS ANOTHER FILE
TO BE SENT to be displayed during HOSTCOPY.
TAPE or CARTRIDGE FIND
Syntax
Parameter options
Positions the tape or cartridge preceding the label record of the file. You can then issue commands to manipulate this file.
This command operates on the tape or cartridge device that has been assigned to the TAPE keyword using the SUB DEV command. Refer to the SUBSTITUTE DEVICE command in the
“System commands” chapter for more information.
You can initiate a FIND operation from either the editor or the system disk.
KEYWORD FIND file-id
KEYWORD
TAPE identifies a 9-track magnetic tape.
CARTRIDGE identifies an 18-track cartridge tape.
file-id
Specifies the file name (one to six characters) and file directory in which it resides.
2-26 XEROX 4050/4090/4450/4650 LPS COMMAND REFERENCE
Logon level
Example
Syntax
Logon level
Syntax
Parameter options
Logon level
Syntax
Parameter options
Logon level
EDITOR COMMANDS
The logon levels are 1 through 5.
EDIT>
CARTRIDGE FIND FSLFIL.CMD
TAPE or CARTRIDGE LIST
Creates a file listing file names on a tape or cartridge, and sorting the names alphabetically.
This command operates on the tape or cartridge device that has been assigned to the TAPE keyword using the SUB DEV command. Refer to the SUBSTITUTE DEVICE command in the
“System commands” chapter for more information.
You can initiate a LIST operation either from the editor or at the system level. For complete information on this command, see
TAPE or CARTRIDGE LIST in the “System commands” chapter.
KEYWORD LIST PRINT
The logon levels 1 through 5.
TAPE or CARTRIDGE NEXT
Identifies the next file on the tape or cartridge and positions the tape or cartridge for manipulating that file. You can initiate a
NEXT operation either from the editor or at the system level.
This command operates on the tape or cartridge device that has been assigned to the TAPE keyword using the SUB DEV command. Refer to the SUBSTITUTE DEVICE command in the
“System commands” chapter for more information.
KEYWORD NEXT
KEYWORD
TAPE identifies a 9-track magnetic tape.
CARTRIDGE identifies an 18-track cartridge tape.
The logon levels are 1 through 5.
TAPE or CARTRIDGE REWIND
When a tape or cartridge job completes (including jobs with a single report option), you can use this command to rewind the tape or cartridge instead of taking the drive offline and performing a manual rewind.
This command operates on the tape or cartridge device that has been assigned to the TAPE keyword using the SUB DEV command. Refer to the SUBSTITUTE DEVICE command in the
“System commands” chapter for more information.
You can initiate a REWIND operation from either the editor or the system disk.
KEYWORD REWIND
KEYWORD
TAPE identifies a 9-track magnetic tape.
CARTRIDGE identifies an 18-track cartridge tape.
The logon levels are 1 through 5.
XEROX 4050/4090/4450/4650 LPS COMMAND REFERENCE 2-27
EDITOR COMMANDS
TAPE or CARTRIDGE SKIP
Syntax
Parameter options
Positions the tape or cartridge after the specified number of files.
You can initiate a SKIP operation either from the editor or at the system level.
This command operates on the tape or cartridge device that has been assigned to the TAPE keyword using the SUB DEV command. Refer to the SUBSTITUTE DEVICE command in the
“System commands” chapter for more information.
KEYWORD SKIP n
KEYWORD
TAPE identifies a 9-track magnetic tape.
CARTRIDGE identifies an 18-track cartridge tape.
n
The number of files to be skipped.
The logon levels are 1 through 5.
Logon level
TAPE or CARTRIDGE UNLOAD
Syntax
Parameter options
Unloads a tape or cartridge from the tape drive rather than taking the drive offline and performing the operation manually. You can initiate an UNLOAD operation either from the editor or at the system level.
This command operates on the tape or cartridge device that has been assigned to the TAPE keyword using the SUB DEV command. Refer to the SUBSTITUTE DEVICE command in the
“System commands” chapter for more information.
KEYWORD UNLOAD
KEYWORD
TAPE identifies a 9-track magnetic tape.
CARTRIDGE identifies an 18-track cartridge tape.
The logon levels are 1 through 5.
Logon level
TAPE or CARTRIDGE VOLINIT
Syntax
Parameter options
Initializes a tape or cartridge in the Xerox labeled format and specifies the data recording density. You can initiate a VOLINIT operation either from the editor or at the system level.
This command operates on the tape or cartridge device that has been assigned to the TAPE keyword using the SUB DEV command. Refer to the SUBSTITUTE DEVICE command in the
“System commands” chapter for more information.
KEYWORD VOLINIT Density
KEYWORD
TAPE identifies a 9-track magnetic tape.
CARTRIDGE identifies an 18-track cartridge tape.
Density
1600 initializes the tape or cartridge at 1600 bpi. This is the default.
2-28 XEROX 4050/4090/4450/4650 LPS COMMAND REFERENCE
EDITOR COMMANDS
6250 initializes the tape or cartridge at 6250 bpi.
The logon levels are 1 through 5.
Logon level
Example
Syntax
Parameter options
Logon level
EDIT>TAPE VOLINIT 1600
TYPE
Displays a source file without editing the file. You can initiate a
TYPE operation either from the editor or at the system level.
TYPE disk-id FILE-ID disk-id
Identifies the system disk (DP0:, DP1:, DP2:, or DP3:) which contains the FILE-ID to be displayed.
FILE-ID
Specifies the file name file-name.file-type.
To view a file in the system, you must have an appropriate level of access to the file itself.
The logon levels are 1 through 5.
XEROX 4050/4090/4450/4650 LPS COMMAND REFERENCE 2-29
3.
Font editor commands
This section describes the font editor commands available for the
4050/4090/4450/4650 LPS . Font editor commands allow you to create and edit font files . You can also modify font and logo files to allow printing.
Font editor
Where to find font information
Selecting source font files
Font files not on the system disk
Primary and secondary source font files
What is general font file information?
The font editor utility enables a font-knowledgeable user, with logon class 2 or higher access privileges, to create font files from existing non licensed and licensed source font files. The user must determine what existing source font files need accessing, when they need accessing, and which characters need copying.
Refer to the LPS Font User Guide for functional and descriptive font information. Use the SAMPLE command described in the
“System commands” chapter if you want font information for a font which currently resides on the system disk.
Evaluate the general and specific characteristics of the standard, licensed, and user-created font files on your system to select the file which most closely matches the requirements of the new font file . The new font files are either an abridged, enhanced, or hybrid version of one or more source font files .
You can load any standard font library font file which is not residing on the system disk from the Standard Font Library magnetic tape, floppy diskette, or cartridge tape. You can also download font files from a channel-attached host. Additional font-related information and assistance are available from the
Xerox Font Center. Refer to the “Downloading host files” chapter in the Xerox 4050/4090/4450/4650 LPS System
Administration Guide for instructions on how to download files from a host computer.
Use existing font files as one of the following:
• Primary source font file, which provides general overall font characteristics, plus specified characters
• Secondary source font file, which provides only specified characters added to the primary source font file.
General font file information applies to the entire font (for example, matrix length, file name in ASCII, program version, pitch, header-character width tables, and so forth). This information comes from the first selected licensed source font file. If a secondary source font file is the first licensed font file selected, general font file information from this file will overwrite
XEROX 4050/4090/4450/4650 LPS COMMAND REFERENCE 3-1
FONT EDITOR COMMANDS
Specific character information
Security information
Maximum font file size
Kanji fonts general font file information from an unlicensed primary source font file. (If none of the source files you select are licensed, the system takes general font characteristics from the primary source font file.)
The font file you create should differ from its primary source font file primarily in the composition of its character set. You can copy characters from either primary or secondary source font files, change the character selection mode for specific characters, and make new character code assignments.
The general characteristics of the new font file are augmented with security information from the first selected licensed source font file, whether or not it is the primary source font file.
Both the source and output font files can be up to 1 MB in size.
The font editor cannot edit a kanji font.
Font file editing sessions
Using command files to create font files
Creating font files in interactive mode
You can create new font files either in an interactive mode or automatically through use of a command file.
You can create command files which you use to generate new font files automatically. When you create a font command file, you include all necessary font information in the command file itself. Refer to the “Command file commands” chapter for more information about command files.
To designate a command file for a preprogrammed editing session, enter FEDIT followed by the command file id, in the following format:
FEDIT @filename.file type
In most instances, file type is .CMD.
If you do not include an END command in the command file, you remain in the font editor at the end of the session. Enter
END to exit the font editor.
Follow the process outlined in table 3-1 to complete an interactive font editing session.
Note: This table provides an overview of the basic font editor commands and the sequence in which you might use them. You might use other commands in a font editing session, such as
SUBSTITUTE or REORDER. Refer to table 3-3 for a complete list of font editor commands.
3-2 XEROX 4050/4090/4450/4650 LPS COMMAND REFERENCE
6
7
8
9
Step
1
2
3
4
5
FONT EDITOR COMMANDS
Table 3-1.
Creating a new font file
Action
Invoke the font editor and specify the font file to use as a primary source font file.
You can perform this step in two ways:
1. Use the FEDIT command to invoke the font editor. When the FEDIT> prompt displays, use the INPUT command to specify the primary source font file.
or
2. Enter FEDIT file-name.file-type to invoke the font editor and select the primary source font file at the same time. When the FEDIT> prompt displays, the font editor is ready to accept the next keyword command.
Use the CHARACTER, HEXADECIMAL, or OCTAL command to set the character selection mode.
Note: This mode is in effect until you specify another character selection mode.
If you do not enter a value, the system default for the initial character selection mode is HEXADECIMAL.
Use the INCLUDE or RECODE command to copy characters from the source font file to the new font file.
Note: INCLUDE specifies which characters in the new font file have the same character code assignments as characters in the source file. RECODE specifies which characters have different character code assignments.
Use the OPEN command to specify the next font file, if you want a secondary source font file.
Use the CHARACTER, HEXADECIMAL, or OCTAL command to set the character selection mode.
Note: You can express characters such as blanks, which do not exist on the keyboard and cannot be expressed as character literals, by their hexadecimal or octal code assignments.
Use the INCLUDE or RECODE command to copy characters from the secondary source font file to the new font file.
Use the CLOSE command to close the secondary source font file when you have finished copying characters.
Use the OUTPUT command to save and name the new font file.
Use the END command to terminate the font editing session.
Sample font editing session In the sample font editing session shown in table 3-2, an existing font file designated as L05TAB is selected as the primary source font file, and an existing font file designated as L05TBC is selected as the secondary source font file. The newly created font file is assigned a unique font file name (UNEEK) which does not conflict with any file names currently in use.
For a complete listing of hexadecimal and octal character codes, refer to the “Character code assignment tables” appendix of the
4050/4090/4450/4650 LPS Print Description Language (PDL)
Reference.
XEROX 4050/4090/4450/4650 LPS COMMAND REFERENCE 3-3
FONT EDITOR COMMANDS
Table 3-2. Sample font editing session
Step Keyword command
1 FEDIT
2 INPUT L05TAB.FNT
3 HEXADECIMAL
Function
Invokes the font editor.
Selects the primary source font file.
Specifies the character selection mode.
4
5
INCLUDE 20
RECODE 3A=41-46
6 OCTAL
7 RECODE 177=44
8 CHARACTER
Specifies the character to be copied.
Specifies the contiguous characters that the system copies and recodes.
Changes the character selection mode.
Specifies the character to be copied.
Changes the character selection mode.
9 INCLUDE 0-9,a-z,A-Z Specifies the characters to be copied.
10 OPEN L05TBC.FNT
Opens the secondary source font file.
11 HEXADECIMAL Changes the character selection mode.
12 INCLUDE 10-11
13 RECODE 12=3D
14 RECODE 13=95
15 RECODE 13=3C
16 RECODE 13=3E
Specifies the characters to be copied.
Specifies the characters that the system copies and recodes.
Same as above.
Same as above.
Same as above.
17 CLOSE Closes the secondary source font file.
18 OUTPUT UNEEK.FNT
Saves and names the new font files.
19 END Terminates the font editing session.
20 SAMPLE UNEEK.FNT
Obtains a copy of the new font file.
Step 3 can be omitted since the initial character selection mode is HEXADECIMAL by default. However, it is necessary to respecify HEXADECIMAL in step 11 because character selection mode was set to CHARACTER in step 8.
Step 4 copies a blank character, which has a hexadecimal code assignment of 20 in the standard ASCII character set. Since the
INCLUDE command is used, the character code assignment does not change for the new font file. This step, as well as step 12, illustrates how you can specify characters as hexadecimal or octal values when the characters do not exist on the keyboard and thus cannot be expressed as literals.
Step 5 copies uppercase characters A through F (hexadecimal character codes 41 through 46 in the standard ASCII character set) and recodes them with contiguous character code assignments 3A through 3F in the new font file.
Step 7 copies the dollar sign ($), which is octal character code 44 in the UNIVAC ASCII character set, and recodes it to octal 177.
Step 9 copies 62 characters expressed as literals from the primary source font file (the digits 0 through 9, the lowercase alphabet, and the uppercase alphabet). Because the INCLUDE command is used, character code assignments do not change for the new
3-4 XEROX 4050/4090/4450/4650 LPS COMMAND REFERENCE
FONT EDITOR COMMANDS font file. For an input device limited to uppercase characters, this step codes as INCLUDE 0-9, A-Z.
Steps 13 through 16 illustrate how you must use separate
RECODE commands for noncontiguous characters.
Step 17 closes L05TBC, the secondary source font file. The primary source font file resumes a foreground status. This step is optional since the secondary source font file closes implicitly when you enter the END command.
Step 18 saves the temporary font file as a permanent font file with the file name UNEEK.
Command summary
Keyword
CHARACTER
CLOSE
END
FEDIT
FIX
HEXADECIMAL
INCLUDE
INPUT
OCTAL
OPEN
OUTPUT
RECODE
REORDER
SUBSTITUTE
Table 3-3 provides a summary of the font editor commands .
Table 3-3.
Font editor commands
Function
Specifies one of three keywords that set the selection mode (refer to
HEXADECIMAL, OCTAL, and CHARACTER) . CHARACTER signifies that subsequent characters included in the new font file will be expressed as character literals.
Terminates access to the current secondary source font file.
Terminates the font editing session.
Invokes the font editor.
Modifies fonts and logos to the LPS configuration.
Specifies one of three keywords that set the selection mode (refer to CHARACTER and OCTAL)
.
HEXADECIMAL signifies that subsequent characters included in the new font file will be expressed as hexadecimal values.
Precedes the list of characters to be copied from the currently accessible source font file to the new font file without character code reassignments (refer to
RECODE).
Specifies the primary source font file.
Specifies one of three keywords that set the selection mode (refer to HEXADECIMAL and CHARACTER) . OCTAL signifies that subsequent characters included in the new font file will be expressed as octal values.
Specifies the secondary source font file.
Stores the current contents of the working storage as a new and permanent font file.
Specifies the list of characters which are copied from the source font file to the new font file with new character code assignments (refer to INCLUDE).
Changes the access sequence of characters within a specified font file as required to achieve compatibility with Interpress standards.
Replaces a blank character with a new character from the font INPUT file.
XEROX 4050/4090/4450/4650 LPS COMMAND REFERENCE 3-5
FONT EDITOR COMMANDS
Commands
CHARACTER
You must invoke the font editor to access the font editor commands . Refer to the FEDIT command in this chapter for more information . The font editor commands appear in alphabetical order .
Syntax
Logon level
Default
Example
Consideration
Specifies that the subsequent font characters are expressed by their character literals rather than by their hexadecimal or octal codes .
CHARACTER
The logon levels are 1 through 5.
The default for specifying a character is hexadecimal code.
Refer to table 3-2 in this chapter.
You cannot specify some characters by character literals, for example, nonprintable characters and delimiters such as blank, comma, and hyphen . You must specify their hexadecimal or octal codes.
CLOSE
END
Syntax
Logon level
Example
Closes the secondary source font file .
CLOSE
You can also close a secondary source font file implicitly by issuing one of the following commands:
• OPEN—Selects another existing font file as a secondary source font file.
• INPUT—Initiates a font editing session for another new font file.
• END—Terminates all font editing operations.
• OUTPUT—Saves the font file which has been modified or created.
The logon levels are 1 through 5.
Refer to table 3-2 in this chapter.
Syntax
Logon level
Example
Exits the font editor . If all new information for the last font file created or modified has not been saved with OUTPUT, the system prompts you to confirm saving the file or losing the file before executing END.
END
The logon levels are 1 through 5.
Refer to table 3-2 in this chapter.
3-6 XEROX 4050/4090/4450/4650 LPS COMMAND REFERENCE
FONT EDITOR COMMANDS
Syntax
Parameter options
Logon level
Example
Syntax
Logon level
Default
Example
Syntax
Parameter options
Logon level
FEDIT
Invokes the font editor and accesses the commands available
.
If you do not enter a parameter, this command begins a font editing session .
FEDIT file-name .FNT
or
FEDIT @ file-name.CMD file-name
Begins a font editing session and specifies the font file to be copied to the work area to be modified or used to create a new font file.
@file-name
Begins a font editing session and specifies the command file with font editor commands to be executed to create or modify a font file.
The logon levels are 1 through 5.
Refer to table 3-2 in this chapter.
HEXADECIMAL
Specifies that the subsequent font characters are expressed by their hexadecimal codes rather than their octal codes or character literals .
HEXADECIMAL
The logon levels are 1 through 5.
The default is to specify a character by its hexadecimal code.
Refer to table 3-2 in this chapter.
INCLUDE
Assigns the same character codes as in the last font file copied by the INPUT command to the specified characters in the new font file . You can specify these characters as hexadecimal or octal codes, or as character literals . (The bitmaps of the specified characters are copied from the INPUT font file to the font file being created.) You can use this command multiple times to copy characters from the INPUT font file.
INCLUDE value value
A-Z
Specifies uppercase characters with contiguous character code assignments, starting with A and ending with Z.
a-z
Specifies lowercase characters with contiguous character code assignments, starting with a and ending with z.
The logon levels are 1 through 5.
XEROX 4050/4090/4450/4650 LPS COMMAND REFERENCE 3-7
FONT EDITOR COMMANDS
INPUT
Example In the following example, the FEDIT command invokes the font editor, and the INPUT command selects a designated font file as the primary source font file for the font editing session . The
CHARACTER command then specifies the use of character literals by the following INCLUDE command.
FEDIT>
FEDIT
FEDIT>
INPUT L05TBC.FNT
FEDIT>
CHARACTER
FEDIT>
INCLUDE A-Z, #a-z
Syntax
Parameter options
Logon level
Example
Considerations
Specifies the font file to use as the primary source file for the new font file you are creating
.
General font characteristics information is copied to the new file.
INPUT file-name .FNT
file-name
Specifies the font file to be used as the source file.
The logon levels are 1 through 5.
Refer to table 3-2 in this chapter.
INPUT will erase a font file just created or modified unless it has been saved with OUTPUT.
OCTAL
OPEN
Syntax
Parameter options
Logon level
Default
Example
Specifies that subsequent font characters are expressed by their octal codes rather than their hexadecimal codes or character literals .
OCTAL
None.
The logon levels are 1 through 5.
The default to specify characters is by hexadecimal codes.
Refer to table 3-2 in this chapter.
Syntax
Parameter options
Logon level
Example
Considerations
Specifies the next font file to use as a secondary source
.
You can copy characters from the secondary file to the new font file . You can also select multiple secondary source font files
.
OPEN file-name .FNT
file-name
The file-id or name of a font file which is opened and accessed as a secondary source font file . The file type .FNT is assumed if omitted.
The logon levels are 1 through 5.
Refer to table 3-2 in this chapter.
You cannot copy characters from the primary source (INPUT) font file until you close the secondary source font file with
“CLOSE.”
3-8 XEROX 4050/4090/4450/4650 LPS COMMAND REFERENCE
Syntax
Parameter options
Logon level
Example
Considerations
Syntax
Parameter options
FONT EDITOR COMMANDS
The available commands are HEXADECIMAL, OCTAL,
CHARACTER, INCLUDE, and RECODE.
A secondary source font file may be incompatible with the font character of the primary source (INPUT) font file
.
The system will display a warning message if this occurs.
OUTPUT
Saves the font file you create or modify
.
OUTPUT file-name .FNT
file-name
Names the font file
.
The file type .FNT is assumed if omitted
.
The logon levels are 1 through 5.
Refer to table 3-2 in this chapter.
OUTPUT executes only if you have copied characters from a source font file with INCLUDE or RECODE.
If an existing font file has the same name as that specified in an
OUTPUT command, the system issues a message requesting confirmation that the existing font file should be overwritten.
If you enter Y, OUTPUT executes . This occurs when you are working on a long font editing session and want to save the intermediate results
.
The latest intermediate results supersede the preceding intermediate results.
If you enter N, OUTPUT does not execute . This response helps to prevent the inadvertent loss of an existing font file . The current newly created font file may be saved by issuing another
OUTPUT command and using a unique file name.
The contents of working storage are not affected by the OUTPUT command
.
Thus, a series of new font files where the first file is a subset of a latter file may be created . This is done by issuing an
OUTPUT command at intermediate points within a font editing session using the same primary source font file and any number of secondary source font files.
RECODE
Copies characters and assigns hexadecimal or octal codes in the new font file which are different from their codes in the source font file.
RECODE value value n=m
Copies the character represented by m (a hexadecimal or octal code, or the character literal) to the character in the new font file which is represented by n.
n-m=x-y
Copies the characters represented by the hexadecimal or octal codes (or character literals) in the range x-y to characters in the new font file which are represented by the range n-m.
XEROX 4050/4090/4450/4650 LPS COMMAND REFERENCE 3-9
FONT EDITOR COMMANDS
Logon level
Considerations
Example n=x-y
Copies the characters represented by the hexadecimal or octal codes (or literal characters) in the range x-y from the source file to characters in the new font file that are represented by the hexadecimal or octal codes (or character literals) beginning with x.
The logon levels are 1 through 5.
When you copy characters with noncontiguous character code assignments, you must enter a separate RECODE command for each character copied and recoded. When you copy characters with contiguous character code assignments, you can abbreviate the list by showing the initial character within the new font file equated to a range of characters within the source font file.
(Specify the range by including the initial character within the source font file, followed by a hyphen, followed by the terminal character within the source font file.)
FEDIT>
OCTAL
FEDIT>
RECODE 44= 232
FEDIT>
HEXADECIMAL
FEDIT>
RECODE 3A=41-46
In the preceding example, the OCTAL keyword command specifies that the character selection mode is octal . Therefore, characters specified by subsequent RECODE command must be expressed as octal values representing character code assignments . As shown, a character within the source font file with character code assignment octal 232 is copied into the new font file and assigned character code of octal 44 . Then the
HEXADECIMAL keyword command sets the character selection mode to hexadecimal . Finally, a string of contiguous characters with character code assignments hexadecimal 41 through 46 in the source file are copied as contiguous characters into the new font and assigned character codes hexadecimal 3A through 3F .
REORDER
Syntax
Parameter options
Logon level
Example
Considerations
Reorders bitmaps into ascending sequence for compatibility with
Interpress standards.
REORDER file-name .FNT
file-name
Specifies the font file whose bitmaps are to be resequenced.
The logon levels are 1 through 5.
FEDIT>
REORDER L05TBC.FNT
Use the REORDER command before you begin to create a new font file. After you finish the reordering process for a specified font file, the font editor remains invoked and is available to perform another REORDER command or to select a primary source font file. Do not issue REORDER during a font editing session once a primary source font file has been specified.
3-10 XEROX 4050/4090/4450/4650 LPS COMMAND REFERENCE
FONT EDITOR COMMANDS
Syntax
Parameter options
Logon level
Example
SUBSTITUTE
Replaces a blank character within the new font with another character from the INPUT font file.
SUBSTITUTE value value m
Copies the character represented by m (a hexadecimal or octal code, or a character literal) from the INPUT font file.
n
Becomes the character represented by m (a hexadecimal or octal code, or a character literal) in the new or modified font file .
The logon levels are 1 through 5.
FEDIT>
SUBSTITUTE 176 177
XEROX 4050/4090/4450/4650 LPS COMMAND REFERENCE 3-11
4.
Command file commands
This chapter describes the command file commands available for the Xerox 4050/4090/4450/4650 Laser Printing Systems. These commands allow you to create and edit command files.
Command file overview
How you use command files
Command files have .CMD extension
Executing command files
A command file is a set of frequently used commands which you create using the editor and store as an executable file. It can be a system command file (consisting of OSS commands), an editor command file (consisting of editor commands), or a font editor command file (consisting of font editor commands).
Because command files preserve and execute any set of commands, you tailor command files to streamline your site’s activities. For example, system command files can be useful for system startup and disk initialization, testing, and shift or day initialization. Font editor command files can be useful for creating new font files automatically. You use editor command files to perform any set of editor operations on other files.
Note: Many command files must be executed by a specific processor. If a command file is written for the font editor, it will not function under the text editor. You use the .BCP command, described in this chapter, to ensure that the command file branches to the correct processor.
Command files are usually given a .CMD file extension. If you save a command file with a file extension which is not .CMD, you must specify both the file name and the file extension to execute the file. For example, a command file called TEST.CMD can be executed with @TEST or @TEST.CMD. A command file called
TEST.TMP, however, can be executed only with @TEST.TMP.
You may execute all command files at the system prompt.
Additionally, you may execute editor command files from the editor and font editor command files from the font editor. Some editor command files and font editor command files may not run properly when executed at the system level, or may run very slowly due to repeated loading of the editor or font editor.
Table 4-1 shows the entries you make to execute each type of command file at the system prompt.
XEROX 4050/4090/4450/4650 LPS COMMAND REFERENCE 4-1
COMMAND FILE COMMANDS
At editor or font editor command level
Operator interaction
Processing print jobs in a command file
Logical command file commands
Table 4-1.
Invoking command files at system level
Type of command file
System command file
Editor command file
Font editor command file
At the system prompt, enter
@file name.file type
EDIT>@file name.file type
FEDIT>@file name.file type
File name is a one- to six-character file name that exists on the disk. File type is optional if the command file has a .CMD
extension. Otherwise, enter the extension.
To execute editor command files at the editor level, enter the
EDIT command to invoke the editor. Then enter the file id.
Similarly, you can execute font editor command files by invoking the font editor first with the FEDIT command, then entering the command file id.
Some utilities, such as REALLOCATE, require operator input in response to questions asked by the processor. The operator must enter these responses, which cannot be coded into the command file. This chapter describes certain command file commands which provide for interaction with the operator during the file’s execution. The system acts upon operator entries between the commands contained in the command file.
Operator entries take effect when the <ENTER> key is pressed.
You must include a .WAIT command after each print job when you process print jobs in a command file. Refer to the .WAIT
command in this chapter for more information.
Command file logical commands, which are identified in table
4-2, cause conditional execution of a command. These commands set symbols to a true or false state, substitute a string of characters for a variable name, and assign an integer value to symbols. The system does not display logical commands unless you enter the .SHOW command, described in this chapter. To turn off the display, use the .NOSHOW command.
Conventions
The following conventions apply to command file commands:
• The at sign (@) must precede the command file id.
• You cannot abbreviate commands within command files.
You must spell out each command.
• Use an asterisk (*) as the first character on a line to indicate that any text which follows is a comment. The comments consist of all characters between the asterisk and the end of the line. A comment line is used to convey information and is ignored by the system.
4-2 XEROX 4050/4090/4450/4650 LPS COMMAND REFERENCE
COMMAND FILE COMMANDS
• Use a semicolon (:) to display messages for the operator.
Messages may be strictly informational, or they may alert the operator when operator input is required at specific points in the command file execution.
For example, you might insert a message to prompt the operator to mount a tape or to warn the operator that certain files have been deleted.
Command summary
A complete listing of the command file commands is shown in table 4-2.
Table 4-2.
Command file commands
Command
.ASK
.ASKS
.ASKV
.BCP
.BEZ
.BF
.BNZ
.BR
.BT
.BX
.CHAIN
.DEC
.DELAY
.EXIT
Branches to the label selected by the operator.
Chains editor command files.
Decrements a symbol.
Delays for a specified time.
Terminates a command file.
.HOME
.INC
Clears the LPS display.
Increments a symbol.
.NOSHOW
Discontinues displaying logical commands.
.PAUSE
Suspends execution of the command file.
.QWAIT
Queues jobs submitted by the command file.
.SETC
.SETD
.SETF
.SETT
.SETV
.SHOW
.WAIT
Function Logical command
Alters symbol settings.
Substitutes a character string for the variable name.
Assigns symbol integer values.
Branches if the correct processor.
Branches if the symbol is zero.
Branches if false.
Branches if the symbol is not zero.
Branches unconditionally.
Branches if true.
Sets the symbol to the current logon class.
Sets variables for date components.
Sets the symbol to false.
Sets the symbol to true.
Sets the symbol to a value.
Displays logical commands.
Suspends command file processing until the print job completes.
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
XEROX 4050/4090/4450/4650 LPS COMMAND REFERENCE 4-3
COMMAND FILE COMMANDS
Commands
The following command file commands are available for the
Xerox 4050/4090/4450/4650 LPS.
*
Logon level
Syntax
Use an asterisk (*) as the first character on a line to indicate that any text which follows the * is a comment. The comment consists of all characters between the * and the end of the line.
A comment line is ignored by the LPS and is used to convey information.
The logon levels are 1 through 5.
* (as first character on line.)
;
Logon level
Syntax
Use a semicolon (;) to display messages for the LPS operator.
Messages are used to prompt the operator about entries the command file cannot provide.
The logon levels are 1 through 5.
; (in 1st position of the record.)
@command-file.CMD
Logon level
OSS syntax
Editor syntax
Font editor syntax
Parameter options
Use editor command files to preserve and execute frequently used sets of OSS, editor, and font editor commands. An OSS command file contains OSS and command file commands. An editor command file contains editor and command file commands, and may also invoke ACCOUNT commands.
The logon levels are 1 through 5.
OSS READY>@file-name.CMD
EDIT>@file-name.CMD
FEDIT>@file-name.CMD
@
Specifies that a command file is identified.
file-name
Specifies the command file to execute.
.CMD
Specifies the file-type (optional).
.ASK
Syntax
Parameter options
Sets the symbol to true if the operator enters Y, and false if the operator enters N or presses ENTER.
.ASK
x ‘question text’ x
Letter between A and H, inclusive. The operator response sets it to true or to false.
4-4 XEROX 4050/4090/4450/4650 LPS COMMAND REFERENCE
Logon level
Example
Syntax
Parameter options
Logon level
Example
Syntax
Parameter options
COMMAND FILE COMMANDS
‘question text’
Prompts the operator for a Y or N response. Single quotes are required. System appends “? (Y/N)” to text.
The logon levels are 1 through 5.
DELETE GBAR.FRM, ABC.JSL, PCHA.TMP
.ASK A ‘DO YOU WANT TO DELETE THE TEST FILES FROM DISK’
This command file entry displays the following message when the command file is executed:
DO YOU WANT TO DELETE THE TEST FILES FROM DISK? (Y/N)
.ASKS
Substitutes a character string entered by the operator for a symbol.
.ASKS
character ‘message text’ character
I or J or K
String entered by operator in response to the ‘message text’ prompt. This is substituted for a symbol, and is a required parameter.
‘message text’
Prompts the operator for string to substitute the I, J, or K value.
The logon levels are 1 through 5.
.ASKS I ‘ENTER FILE NAME TO DELETE‘
DELETE % I
This command file entry displays the following message when the command file is executed:
ENTER FILE NAME TO DELETE
In response, the operator enters a character string which is substituted for the
% I
in the DELETE command. The system then deletes the specified file.
.ASKV
Sets the symbol X to a value between 0 and 255, inclusive. The value is the operator‘s response to the ‘question text,’ prompt.
The .ASKV command always precedes the .BX command, which then tests the value of X against certain labels for the purpose of branching.
.ASKV
x ‘question text’ x
A letter between A and H, inclusive. The operator response to the question text sets it to an integer value between 0 and
255, inclusive.
‘question text’
Prompts the operator for an integer entry between 0 and
255, inclusive. Single quotes are required.
XEROX 4050/4090/4450/4650 LPS COMMAND REFERENCE 4-5
COMMAND FILE COMMANDS
Logon level
Example
The logon levels are 1 through 5.
See the .BX command in this chapter for an example that includes the .ASKV command.
.BCP
Syntax
Parameter options
Logon level
Example
Ensures proper operation by branching to the specified label if the command file is invoked by the correct processor.
.BCP
keyword n keyword
EDITOR, SYSTEM, or FEDIT
Specifies the command file type (required).
n
A label having a value of 1 to 32767.
The logon levels are 1 through 5.
In the following example, the .BCP command prevents the editor and font editor from trying to execute the system command file.
* THIS COMMAND FILE MUST BE RUN AT THE SYSTEM LEVEL
.BCP EDITOR, SYSTEM 20
; THIS COMMAND FILE MUST BE RUN AT THE SYSTEM LEVEL
; PLEASE RESTART IT
.EXIT
.20
.
body of system level command file
.
.
.EXIT
.BEZ
Syntax
Parameter options
Logon level
Branches to the specified label if the value of the symbol equals zero.
.BEZ
x n x
Letter between A and H, inclusive, that represents an integer between 0 and 255 inclusive.
n
Label consisting of a period followed by an integer between
0 and 255, inclusive.
The logon levels are 1 through 5.
.BF
Syntax
Parameter options
Branches to the specified label if the value of the symbol is false.
.BF
x n x
Letter between A and H, inclusive, that represents the value true or false.
4-6 XEROX 4050/4090/4450/4650 LPS COMMAND REFERENCE
Logon level
Example
Syntax
Parameter options
Logon level
Syntax
Parameter options
Logon level
Example
COMMAND FILE COMMANDS n
Label consisting of a period followed by an integer between
0 and 255 inclusive.
The logon levels are 1 through 5.
.ASKS I ‘ENTER NAME OF FILE TO DELETE
.BF I 80
DELETE % I
.80
This command file entry displays the following message when the command file is executed:
ENTER FILE NAME TO DELETE
In response to this, the operator enters a character string (the file name) which is substituted for the
% I
in the DELETE command.
However, the command
.BF I 80
branches around the DELETE command if the operator presses the <ENTER> key without entering a character string.
.BNZ
Branches to the specified level if the value of the symbol is not equal to zero.
.BNZ
x n x
Letter between A and H, inclusive, that represents an integer between 0 and 255, inclusive.
n
Label consisting of a period followed by an integer between
0 and 255, inclusive.
The logon levels are 1 through 5.
.BR
Branches unconditionally to the specified label.
.BR
n n
Label consisting of a period followed by an integer between
0 and 255, inclusive.
The logon levels are 1 through 5.
DELETE GBAR.FRM, ABC.JSL, PCHA.TMP
;**FILES HAVE BEEN DELETED**
.70
.ASKS I ‘ENTER NAME OF ANOTHER FILE TO DELETE’
.BF I 80
DELETE % I
.BR 70
.80
END
XEROX 4050/4090/4450/4650 LPS COMMAND REFERENCE 4-7
COMMAND FILE COMMANDS
.BT
The
.BR 70
entry in this command file branches to label
.70
when the operator enters a file name in response to the message
ENTER
NAME OF ANOTHER FILE TO DELETE
. When you have entered the file names of every file you want to delete, press the <ENTER> key, and the .
BF I 80
entry branches around the DELETE command to label
.80
.
Syntax
Parameter options
Logon level
Branches to the specified label if the value of the symbol is true.
.BT
x n x
Letter between A and H, inclusive, that represents the value true or false.
n
Label consisting of a period followed by an integer between
0 and 255, inclusive.
The logon levels are 1 through 5.
.BX
Syntax
Parameter options
Logon level
Example
Branches to the specified label you selected.
.BX
x .n
0
.n
1
,...
n n x
A letter between A and H, inclusive, that represents an integer between 0 and 255, inclusive. Each possible value corresponds to an option given to the operator.
n
0
Multiple labels consisting of a period followed by an integer value between 0 and 255.
n
1
...
Number of labels used in this command equals the number of options given the operator. The operator enters a number representing the position of the option selected (1 for first option), and the program branches to the corresponding label.
The logon levels are 1 through 5.
.ASKV B ‘ENTER NUMBER OF TEST FILES TO BE COPIED (0 - 3).
.BX B 60, 56, 54, 52
.52
COPY TAPE LABEL GBAR.FRM
.54
COPY TAPE LABEL ABC.JSL
.56
COPY TAPE LABEL PCHA.TMP
.60
.ASK A ‘DO YOU WANT TO DELETE THE TEST FILES FROM DISK’
This command file entry displays the following message when the command file is executed:
ENTER NUMBER OF TEST FILES TO BE COPIED (0 - 3)
4-8 XEROX 4050/4090/4450/4650 LPS COMMAND REFERENCE
Syntax
Parameter options
Logon level
Default
Syntax
Parameter options
Logon level
Syntax
Parameter options
Logon level
Syntax
COMMAND FILE COMMANDS
The operator assigns one of four values (0 to 3) to the symbol B, which must correspond to the number of labels that the command .BX tests B against. If the operator enters 0, the .BX
command branches to label .60, no files are copied, and the system displays the message
DO YOU WANT TO DELETE THE TEST
FILES FROM DISK? (Y/N)
If the operator enters 1, the .BX
command branches to label .56, and the PCHA.TMP file is copied. If the operator enters 2, the .BX command branches to label .54, and the ABC.JSL file is copied; and so forth.
.CHAIN
Closes the current command file and begins to process the file specified. This command clears all values and strings.
.CHAIN
file-name .file-type file-name
Specifies the file name required.
file-type
Specifies the file type.
The logon levels are 1 through 5.
The default is .CMD.
.DEC
Decreases the value of x by 1.
.DEC
x x
Letter between A and H, inclusive, that represents an integer value between 0 and 255, inclusive. If its value is 0, subtracting 1 assigns it a value of 255.
The logon levels are 1 through 5.
.DELAY
Suspends the command file process for the specified period of time.
.DELAY
n n
Specifies the delay in seconds before processing continues.
Must be within the range 0 to 300 seconds (0 seconds to 5 minutes).
The logon levels are 1 through 5.
Ends the command file process. Ending the command file also discontinues command file processing.
.EXIT
.EXIT
XEROX 4050/4090/4450/4650 LPS COMMAND REFERENCE 4-9
COMMAND FILE COMMANDS
Logon level
Example
The logon levels are 1 through 5.
.WAIT
;COMMAND FILE COMPLETED
.EXIT
.HOME
Syntax
Logon level
Example
Clears the LPS display. The cursor is set to the upper left corner of the display.
.HOME
The logon levels are 1 through 5.
*SAMPLE SYSTEM LEVEL COMMAND FILE
*TEST NEW FLS’S AND JSL FOR PRODUCTION
;COMMAND FILE TO PERFORM FDL, PDL AND START TEST JOB
.HOME
.INC
Syntax
Parameter options
Logon level
Increases the value of x by 1.
.INC
x x
Letter between A and H inclusive that represents an integer value between 0 and 255 inclusive. If its value is 255, adding
1 assigns it a value of 0.
The logon levels are 1 through 5.
.NOSHOW
Syntax
Logon level
Example
Ends the screen display of logical commands during the command file process.
.NOSHOW
The logon levels are 1 through 5.
.
SHOW
ASKV B ‘ENTER NUMBER OF TEST FILES TO BE COPIED (0 -3)’
BX B 60, 56, 54, 52
.52
COPY TAPE LABEL GBAR.FRM
.54
COPY TAPE LABEL ABC.JSL
.56
COPY TAPE LABEL PCHA.TMP
.60
.NOSHOW
.PAUSE
Syntax
Parameter options
Temporarily suspends the execution of a command file.
.PAUSE
None.
4-10 XEROX 4050/4090/4450/4650 LPS COMMAND REFERENCE
Logon level
Example
Syntax
Logon level
COMMAND FILE COMMANDS
The message
OS1275 COMMAND FILE SUSPENDED displays and processing stops until you press <ENTER> or enter the
@RESUME command. If you enter @ABORT at this point, command file processing stops.
The logon levels are 1 through 5.
*SAMPLE SYSTEM LEVEL COMMAND FILE
*TEST NEW FSL’S AND JSL FOR PRODUCTION
;COMMAND FILE TO PERFORM FDL, PDL AND START TEST JOB
.HOME
;MOUNT TAPE CONTAINING TEST FSL FILES
;AFTER TAPE IS MOUNTED TYPE ENTER
.PAUSE
.QWAIT
Queues the print job just submitted by the command file. The
.QWAIT command can replace the .WAIT command in command files written for previous OSS versions.
.QWAIT
The .QWAIT command delays command file execution until the job completes input processing. Using .QWAIT allows the command file to run faster because input processing of a job can occur simultaneously with output processing of the previous job.
Figure 4-1 illustrates the use of QWAIT in a command file.
The logon levels are 1 through 5.
Figure 4-1.
.QWAIT sample code in a command file
START <job A>
START <job B>
.QWAIT
START <job C>
.QWAIT
START <job D>
/* Job A starts.
*/
/*
/*
/*
/*
/*
Job B is queued to start input processing when job A finishes input processing and begins printing.
The command file waits for job A to complete
*/
*/ printing before executing the next step.
Job C is processed by input when job B begins output processing.
The command file waits for job B to complete
*/ printing before executing the next step.
Job D is processed by input when job B begins output processing.
*/
*/
Syntax
Parameter options
Logon level
Assigns the value of the current logon class to the symbol x.
.SETC
x x
Letter between A and H inclusive that represents an integer value between 1 and 5 inclusive.
The logon levels are 1 through 5.
.SETC
XEROX 4050/4090/4450/4650 LPS COMMAND REFERENCE 4-11
COMMAND FILE COMMANDS
.SETD
Syntax
Parameter options
Logon level
Restriction
Examples
Sets up variables for the following date components: year, month, day of the month, hour, minute, second, day of the week.
.SETD
value value m
Variable between A and H, inclusive, that sets the year.
n
Variable between A and H, inclusive, that sets the month.
o
Variable between A and H, inclusive, that sets the day of the month.
p
Variable between A and H, inclusive, that sets the hour.
q
Variable between A and H, inclusive, that sets the minute.
r
Variable between A and H, inclusive, that sets the second.
s
Variable between A and H, inclusive, that sets the day of the week.
The logon levels are 1 through 5.
The variables are positional. Variables may be omitted, but each omitted variable must be replaced by a comma.
.SETD
,,,,,,A
Sets A to the day of the week.
.SETD
C B A
Sets C to the year, B to the month, and A to the day of the month.
.SETD
A B C
Invalid. Commas are required.
.SETF
Syntax
Parameter options
Logon level
Sets the symbol value to false.
.SETF
x x
Letter between A and H, inclusive.
The logon levels are 1 through 5.
.SETT
Syntax
Parameter options
Logon level
Sets the symbol value to true.
.SETT
x x
Letter between A and H, inclusive.
The logon levels are 1 through 5.
4-12 XEROX 4050/4090/4450/4650 LPS COMMAND REFERENCE
COMMAND FILE COMMANDS
Syntax
Parameter options
Logon level
Syntax
Logon level
Example
Syntax
Logon level
.SETV
Sets the symbol value to the value of v.
.SETV
x=v x
Letter between A and H, inclusive.
v
Integer value between 0 and 255, inclusive.
The logon levels are 1 through 5.
.SHOW
Begins screen displays of logical commands during the command file process.
.SHOW
The logon levels are 1 through 5.
.
SHOW
ASKV B ‘ENTER NUMBER OF TEST FILES TO BE COPIED (0 -3)’
BX B 60, 56, 54, 52
.52
COPY TAPE LABEL GBAR.FRM
.54
COPY TAPE LABEL ABC.JSL
.56
COPY TAPE LABEL PCHA.TMP
.60
.NOSHOW
.WAIT
Delays the command file process until the submitted print job completes processing.
.WAIT
A system command file must include a .WAIT command after each print job (whether a START, SAMPLE, or disk print job, such as an FDL or PDL compilation with printing specified).
Otherwise, the commands following the print job request are refused because the system is printing. When the .WAIT
command executes, the message
OS1275 COMMAND FILE SUSPENDED displays.
Any operator entry made during this waiting period functions normally. An @ABORT entry discontinues command file processing.
The logon levels are 1 through 5.
XEROX 4050/4090/4450/4650 LPS COMMAND REFERENCE 4-13
COMMAND FILE COMMANDS
START <job A>
START <job B>
.WAIT
START <job C>
.WAIT
START <job D>
Figure 4-2 illustrates the use of WAIT in a command file.
Figure 4-2.
.WAIT sample code in a command file
/*
/*
/*
/*
/*
/*
Job A is started.
Job B is queued to start input processing when job A finishes input processing and begins printing.
The command file waits for jobs A and B to complete printing before executing the next
step.
Job C starts after job B completes output processing.
The command file waits for job C to complete printing before executing the next step.
Job D starts after job C completes output processing.
*/
*/
*/
*/
*/
*/
4-14 XEROX 4050/4090/4450/4650 LPS COMMAND REFERENCE
Glossary
A3 International paper size measuring 297 by 420 mm or 11.69 by
16.54 inches.
A4 International paper size measuring 210 by 297 mm or 8.27 by
11.69 inches.
B4 International paper size measuring 250 by 353 mm or 9.84 by
13.9 inches.
batch processing Process that allows for repetitive operations to be performed sequentially on batched data without much involvement from the computer operator.
BCD Binary coded decimal.
bitmap Visual representation of graphic images in which a bit defines a picture element (pixel) and a matrix of bits defines an image. For example, if a bit is 1, the corresponding pixel is printed. blocking Process of combining two or more records into a single block of data which can moved, operated upon, stored, and so on, as a single unit by the computer. block length Number of characters or bytes contained in a block of data (the block is treated as a unit within the computer). Block length is usually invariable within a system and may be specified in units such as records, words, computer words, or characters.
BOF Bottom of form.
BOT Beginning of tape.
bpi Bits per inch.
CCID Character Code Identifier. Code associated with the universal identifier “Xerox” to indicate the version of the Xerox character code standard used to code Interpress strings. character set Set of all characters defined in a font, including alphabet, numeric, and special characters such as symbols. cluster Group of related feeder trays, usually containing the same size and type of paper (stock). Each cluster has a name, consisting of one to six alphanumeric characters.
XEROX 4050/4090/4450/4650 LPS COMMAND REFERENCE GLOSSARY-1
GLOSSARY
GLOSSARY-2
CME Entry modifying the output printing characteristics of a report on a copy-to-copy basis.
compiler Software that translates instructions written in high-level language into machine language for execution by a system.
Copy Modification Entry See CME. copy-sensitive Job in which multiple copies of a report contain different data, such as paychecks and banking statements.
cpi Characters per inch.
default Value assigned to a field by the system if no input is received from the operator. You can change the default value of a field.
DJDE Dynamic Job Descriptor Entry. Command within an input data stream used to modify the printing environment dynamically. dot Picture element (pixel) imaged by a printer. The number of dots imaged per inch measures printer resolution, for example, 300 dots per mich (dpi). See also spot. dpi Dots per inch. Indicates the number of dots per inch displayed on a terminal screen or printed to form a character or graphic. dry ink Minute particles of resin and carbon black that can accept an electrical charge and create images. Resin and carbon black or color pigment toner are combined with developer to form the dry ink.
duplex 1. Ability of a data communications system to send and receive information simultaneously. 2. In printing, duplex means printing on both sides of the paper.
Dynamic Job Descriptor Entry See DJDE. edgemarking Use of graphic objects (usually lines or boxes) that bleed off the edge of the physical page. See also physical page.
embedded blanks Blank spaces within a command line.
ENET Ethernet network.
EOT End of tape.
Ethernet Xerox local area network (LAN) that allows transmission of data by cable from one device to another.
XEROX 4050/4090/4450/4650 LPS COMMAND REFERENCE
GLOSSARY
FCB Forms Control Buffer. Controls the vertical format of printed output.
FCP File Control Parameter.
FCU File Conversion Utility.
FDL Forms Description language. LPS-resident source language used to design electronic forms. See also FSL and form.
FDR File directory.
FIS Font Interchange Standard. Defines the digital representation of fonts and character metrics for the generation of an entire series of Interpress fonts. floating accent Nonspacing accent characters that can be combined with characters and printed as a composite. font Complete set of characters of a particular font family having the same point size, weight, stress, and orientation.
Font Interchange Standard See FIS. form 1. Compiled .FSL file. 2. Specific arrangement of lines, text, and graphics stored in an electronic version. Forms can be printed without variable data or merged with variable data during the printing process. See also FDL and FSL.
Forms Control Buffer See FCB.
Forms Description Language See FDL.
Forms Source Library See FSL.
FSL Forms Source Library. Uncompiled collection of user-created files containing FDL commands. See also FDL and form.
hexadecimal Numbering system with a base of 16. The numbers 10 through
15 are represented by A through F. highlight color Printing with black plus another color. A range of colors, tints, and shades is printed by varying the percentage of black dots, colored dots, and the white space between the dots.
HIP Host Interface Processor.
image area Area on a physical page that may contain text or graphics.
XEROX 4050/4090/4450/4650 LPS COMMAND REFERENCE GLOSSARY-3
GLOSSARY
GLOSSARY-4 initialize 1. To prepare a blank diskette so it can accept data. This is usually accomplished when a program is booted. 2. To set all information in a computer system to its starting values.
Interpress Industry-standard page description language developed by Xerox.
Interpress documents can be printed on any sufficiently powerful printer equipped with Interpress print software.
JCB Job Control Block.
JCL Job Control Language.
JDE Job Descriptor Entry. Collection of job descriptions.
JDL Job Description Library. Collection of compiled job descriptions.
See also JSL.
JID Job Identifier.
job Synonymous with a START command, a job is a group of print data sets called reports. A job may contain one or multiple reports.
job control Program called into storage to prepare each job or job step to be run.
Job Descriptor Entry See JDE.
Job Descriptor Library See JDL. job management Collective functions of job scheduling and command processing.
Job Source Library See JSL.
JSL Job Source Library. Collection of uncompiled job descriptions.
See also JDE and JDL. keyword Required part of a command. label Reference to a file saved on tape or disk, a record indicating the file name or date created, or other control information.
landscape Orientation in which text and images are positioned parallel to the long edge of the paper. legal size Paper size measuring 8.5 by 14 inches or 216 by 356 mm. letter size Paper size measuring 8.5 by 11 inches or 216 by 279 mm.
XEROX 4050/4090/4450/4650 LPS COMMAND REFERENCE
GLOSSARY line feed Control character that (unless set to be interpreted as a line end) causes the printing system to begin printing in the current character position of the next line.
literal Alphanumeric character beginning with a letter, including an asterisk, period, colon, or slash, and not enclosed in single quotes.
logical page In Xerox printing systems, a logical page is a formatted page that is smaller than the physical page. A logical page is defined by an origin, thus allowing more than one logical page to be placed on a physical page. lpi Lines per inch.
LPS Laser printing system. mask Selection of bits from a storage unit by use of an instruction that eliminates the other bits in the unit. In accessing files, a file name mask is used to reference one or more files with similar file-id (identifier) syntax. In Interpress, a mask serves as a template, indicating the shape and position of an object on a page. metacode Method of controlling the image generator. The character dispatcher uses these codes to generate scan line information.
This information is sent in the form of character specifications to the image generator, which uses it to compose the bit stream that modulates the laser. Also called native mode.
monochrome Printing in one color only.
nesting Subroutine or set of data, such as a comment, contained sequentially within another set of data. object file Source file converted into machine language (binary code).
octal System of representing numbers based on 8.
offset To place printed output sets in slightly different positions from each other in an output bin for easy separation of collated sets. operand That which is acted upon, for example, data, in an operation or process. operating system Software that controls the low-level tasks in a computer system, such as input or output and memory management. The operating system is always running when the computer is active.
XEROX 4050/4090/4450/4650 LPS COMMAND REFERENCE GLOSSARY-5
GLOSSARY
GLOSSARY-6 orientation In reference to image area, describes whether the printed lines are parallel to the long edge of the paper (landscape) or the short edge of the paper (portrait). origin In reference to image area, the upper left corner of a sheet. overprint ratio Maximum number of variable data and form characters that can be intersected by a single scan line.
packet A group of DJDE records terminated by an END command.
page end Command character (form feed) to terminate the current page.
palette Predefined set of colors or inks. Different versions are provided with the printer and with host- or PC-based application software.
parameter Part of a command, other than the keyword. See keyword.
parse To read or interpret a command; to build up a parameter list from information within a command.
PCC Printer Carriage Control.
PDE Page Description Entry.
PDL Print Description Language. Language used to describe printing jobs to a laser printing system. PDL describes the input (type, format, characteristics), performs the processing functions
(logical processing), and describes the output (type, format, font selection, accounting options).
PE Phase encoded.
physical page Actual page size your printer uses to print a form.
pitch Width of a fixed-pitch font expressed in characters per horizontal inch.
pixel Acronym for picture element. Smallest addressable point of a bitmapped screen that can be independently assigned color and intensity.
point In Xerox laser printing systems, a unit of measurement equal to
0.0139 inch. Points are always used to express type, size, and leading. There are 12 points to a pica and about 72 points to an inch. portrait Orientation in which text and images are positioned parallel to the short edge of the paper.
XEROX 4050/4090/4450/4650 LPS COMMAND REFERENCE
GLOSSARY ppm Pages per minute.
Print Description Language See PDL. print file Portion of the system disk memory (up to 4 MB) reserved for temporary storage of formatted pages for printing. Pages are retained until they are delivered to the output tray.
PSC Printer Subsystem Controller.
query Request for data or other information, entered by an operator while the system is processing. record A line of data as defined in the RECORD command.
report A single output data set, delimited by an RSTACK command or as a file. In setting a separation boundary, reports are subsets of a job.
resolution Number of dots per inch (dpi) or spots per inch (spi). The greater the number of dots, the higher the resolution and the clearer the image. The terms dots, spots, and pixels are synonymous.
scale To adjust font or image size according to given proportions.
sequential 1. In numeric sequence, usually in ascending order. 2. A file structure in which records are written one after another and cannot be randomly accessed.
set Multiple copies of the same report.
simplex printing Printing on one side of the page.
spi Spots per inch. See resolution.
spot A picture element imaged by the printer. Synonymous with dot and pixel.
statement Detailed instructions in a program step, written according to specific rules called syntax. stock User-defined name in the JSL that specifies a certain type of paper for printing a job. stockset Collection of stocks to be used on a print job. See also stock. string Connected sequence of alphanumeric characters treated as one unit of data by a program.
XEROX 4050/4090/4450/4650 LPS COMMAND REFERENCE GLOSSARY-7
GLOSSARY syntax Rules governing the structure of expressions in a programming language. system page Maximum area in which text and graphics can be imaged on a printing system. tape density Expression of the format of a magnetic tape measured in number of bytes that can be stored per inch of tape.
TOF Top of form.
two-up Printing two logical pages on one side of a physical page.
UCSB Universal Character Set Buffer.
UCS Universal Character Set.
variable data Changeable information which is merged with a standard document to create specialized or personalized versions of that document. Variable data is not a part of a form design, but varies from page to page. virtual page Page area selected by a forms designer for printing.
vpos Vertical positioning.
wildcard Character (usually an asterisk *) which can be inserted into a command string to indicate that it may represent one or more characters in that position.
XDDI Xerox Dynamic Document Interface.
xdot Unit of measurement representing a fraction of an inch. May also be referred to as a picture element (pixel) or spot; for example, 1/600 spots per inch (spi). xerographic mode Either of two possible printer configurations: 1. Black mode which allows printing with black dry ink only. 2. Highlight mode which enables both highlight color and black printing.
XNS Xerox Network Systems.
XPAF, XPF Xerox Printer Access Facility.
GLOSSARY-8 XEROX 4050/4090/4450/4650 LPS COMMAND REFERENCE
Index
Numerals
.25 inch tape cartridge, see cartridge tape
.5 inch tape cartridge, see cartridge tape
9-track magnetic tape, see tape
18-track magnetic tape, see tape
871 communication module, see 871-CM
871-CM, 1-46 to 1-48, 1-50
3211 channel, see IBM 3211 channel
3480 compatible tape cartridge, 1-11
Symbols
* command, 4-4
; command, 4-4
@ command-file. CMD, 4-4 to 4-5
@SETTMO command, 1-94
A
ABORT command, 1-6 to 1-7 access, preventing, 1-91
ACCOUNT command, 1-7 to 1-10
ALIGN command, 1-10 to 1-11
ASK command, 4-4
ASKS command, 4-5
ASKV command, 4-5
B backup, system, 1-11, 1-26 to 1-27 bad blocks, 1-15 to 1-16
BC command, 1-11
BCP command, 4-6
BD command, 1-11
BEZ command, 4-6
BF command, 1-12, 4-6
BNZ command, 4-7
Boot button, 1-11 to 1-12 booting process, 1-11 to 1-12, 1-26, 1-77
BR command, 4-7 to 4-8
BSC environment, 1-47
BT command, 1-11, 4-8 button, Boot, 1-11 to 1-12
BX command, 1-11, 4-8 to 4-9
Bypass Transport (BT), 1-92
C
C command, 2-9
CANCEL command, 1-12
CANCEL ENTRY command, 1-12 to 1-13
CAR keyword, 1-27, 1-109 to 1-116 card-image format files, 1-57 to 1-58
CARTRIDGE EOF command, 2-25 to 2-26
CARTRIDGE ENDFILE command, 2-25 to 2-26
XEROX 4050/4090/4450/4650 LPS COMMAND REFERENCE
CARTRIDGE FIND command editor, 2-26 system, 1-113
CARTRIDGE LIST command editor, 2-27 system, 1-113 to 1-114
CARTRIDGE NEXT command editor, 2-27 system, 1-114 to 1-115
CARTRIDGE NOEOF command, 2-25 to 2-26
CARTRIDGE REWIND command editor, 2-27 system, 1-115
CARTRIDGE SKIP command editor, 2-26 to 2-28 system, 1-115
CARTRIDGE UNLOAD command editor, 2-28 system, 1-115
CARTRIDGE VOLINIT command editor, 2-28 to 2-29 system, 1-115 to 116 cartridge tape booting, 1-11 drive identifying, 1-109 keyword, assigning, 1-109, 1-111 listing files, 1-113 to 1-115 naming, 1-111 to 1-112 positioning tape, 1-113, 1-115 file copying, 1-17 to 1-21
CE command, 2-9
CHAIN command, 4-9
CHARACTER command, 3-6
CLEAR command, 2-9
CLEAR QUEUE command, 1-13
CLOSE command, 3-6
CLP command, 1-14 to 1-15
CLUSTER command, 1-14 to 1-15 clusters, 1-14 to 1-15, 1-31 to 1-33 color formats, 1-29 to 1-31, 1-68 printing requirements, xi graphic sample, 1-88 to 1-89 command file command summary, 4-3 commands, 4-4 to 4-14 conventions, 4-2 to 4-3 overview, 4-1 to 4-2 commands, restricting access, see RCU
COMPRESS command, 1-15 to 1-16
INDEX-1
INDEX console entries, 1-21 to 1-25
CONTINUE command, 1-16 to 1-17 conventions command file, 4-2 to 4-3 document, ix editor, 2-5 to 2-6
CONVERT command, 2-10 converting color format, 1-29 to 1-31 files, 2-10 spi, see SCALE command
COPY command editor, 2-10 system description, 1-17 types, 1-17 to 1-21 corrupted files, 1-15 to 1-16 cylinders, see REALLOCATE command
D
D command, 2-11
Data Capture, 1-16, 1-74; see also DCU command
Data Mode Ready, see DMR date, setting, 1-93 to 1-94
DCU command
CAPTURE, 1-21 to 1-22 description, 1-21
DELETE, 1-22 to 1-23
EXIT, 1-23
FORMAT CONSOLE DISPLAY, 1-23
FORMAT CONSOLE PRINT, 1-23 to 1-24
HELP, 1-24
REMINDER, 1-24 to 1-25
RESET, 1-25
SHOW, 1-25 see also Data Capture
DDCMP, 1-48
DEC command, 4-9
DELAY command, 4-9
DELETE command editor, 2-11 system, 1-25 to 1-26 descriptor page, 1-44, 1-86 devices, finishing, 1-28, 133
Digital Data Communication Message Protocol, see DDCMP directories compressing, 1-15 to 1-16 types, 2-2 to 2-3 disk error report, 1-16 file copying, 1-17 to 1-21 fragmentation, 1-26
Disk Save and Restore utility, see DSR command
DISPLAY command, 2-12
DJDE, 1-32
DMR, 1-48 documentation, other, x
DRAIN command, 1-26 drives identifying, 1-109 keyword, assigning, 1-109, 1-111
INDEX-2 listing files, 1-113 to 1-115 positioning tape, 1-113, 1-115
DSR command, 1-26 to 1-27 restore, 1-27 tape, 111, 1-102
DUPLICATE command, 2-12
Dynamic Job Descriptor Entry, see DJDE
E echo test, 1-50
EDI, 1-17, 1-19
EDIT command editor, 2-13 system, 1-27 to 1-28 editor command summary, 2-7 to 2-8 commands, 2-9 to 2-29 conventions, 2-5 to 2-6 description, 2-1 to 2-3 sample session, 2-3 to 2-5
END command editor, 2-13 font editor, 3-6
ENDJOB command, 1-28
Ethernet system, 1-47
EXIT command, 4-9 to 4-10
F
F command, 2-13 to 2-14
FCG command, 1-28
FCHECK command, 1-29
FCU command, 1-29 to 1-31
FEDIT command font editor, 3-7 system, 1-31
FEED command, 1-31 to 1-33
FEX command, 1-33
FID command editor, 2-14 system, 1-33 to 1-34
FILE command editor, 2-14 to 2-15 system, 1-34 to 1-36
File Conversion Utility, see FCU command files access, restricting, 1-91 to 1-92 compressing, 1-15 to 1-16 converting, 2-10 copying, 1-17 to 1-21, 2-10 deleting, 1-25 to 1-26, 1-85 to 1-86 displaying, 1-103, 2-24 fragmentation, 1-29 listing, 1-72 to 1-73, 2-12, 2-24 renaming, 1-86 retrieving, 2-15 to 2-16 saving, 2-23
FIND command, 2-15 finishing devices, 1-28, 1-33
FIS, 1-58 to 1-59
FIX command, 1-36
XEROX 4050/4090/4450/4650 LPS COMMAND REFERENCE
INDEX
FLF command
CLEAR, 1-37
CREATE, 1-37 description, 1-36
DUPLICATE, 1-37
ERASE, 1-37
FLF
?, 1-39
DUPLICATE, 1-37
END, 1-37
FLB, 1-38
FLD, 1-39
FORMAT, 1-38
HELP, 1-39
LABEL, 1-39
SSF, 1-38
FLOPPY command editor, 2-15 system
CLEAR, 1-40 description, 1-39
DELETE, 1-40
FCHECK, 1-40
FILE, 1-41
FORMAT, 1-41
LIST, 1-41
RESTORE, 1-42
SAVE, 1-42 to 1-43 font editor commands, 4-2 command summary, 3-5 commands, 3-6 to 3-11 creating files, 3-3 description, 3-1 to 3-2 file editing, 3-2 to 3-5
Interpress, 1-59 to 1-65
Kanji, 3-2 printing sample, 1-87 to 1-88 tape file format, 1-58
Font Interchange Standard, see FIS
FONTS command, 1-43 forms color format, 1-29 to 1-31, 1-68 multiple copies, 1-88 printing sample, 1-87 to 1-88
FORMS command, 1-43 to 1-44
Forms Source Library, see FSL fragmentation disk, 1-26 file, 1-29
FSL, 1-30,
G
GET command, 2-15 to 2-16
GPCE command, 2-16
GRAPHIC command, 1-44 printing, 1-88 to 1-89
GVG2 processor, 1-87
XEROX 4050/4090/4450/4650 LPS COMMAND REFERENCE
H
HARDCOPY command, 1-44 to 1-45
HEXADECIMAL command, 3-7 highlight color printing, xi
HIP commands
ABORT, 1-45 to 1-46
CHANGE, 1-46
DIAG, 1-46 to 1-47
END, 1-47, 1-53
EXIT, 1-16, 1-47
HOST, 1-47
JOBS, 1-48, 1-50 to 1-53
LOG, 1-48 to 1-49
OFFLINE, 1-49
ONLINE, 1-49, 1-56
RESET, 1-6, 1-49
SEND, 1-49 to 1-50
SHOW BUFFER, 1-50
SHOW ECHO SERVERS, 1-50
SHOW HOSTS, 1-50
SHOW JOBS, 1-50
SHOW LOG, 1-53 to 1-55
SHOW VERSION, 1-55
SJC, 1-56
SLC, 1-56
START, 1-56
STOP, 1-56 to 1-57 description, 1-45
HOME command, 4-10
Host Interface Processor, see HIP
HOSTCOPY command, 1-57 to 1-58, 2-26 hosts, available, 1-50
I
IBM 3211 channel, 1-48, 1-117
IBM MBAIS data, 1-29
IBM MVS/XA environment, 1-48
IFU commands
COMPRESS, 1-60
COPY, 1-60 to I-61
DEFAULT, 1-61
DELETE, 1-61
FDR, 1-62
FILE, 1-62
IPFNTS, 1-62
LIST, 1-62 to 1-63
MOVE, 1-63
PRINTER, 1-63
REWIND, 1-64
UNLOAD, 1-64
VOLINIT, 1-64 to 1-65
SAMPLE, 1-65
SUBSTITUTION, 1-64 description, 1-58 to 1-60 image alignment, 1-10 to 1-11 color format, 1-29 to 1-31 truncated, 1-65
INDEX-3
INDEX
IMAGE command, 1-65 to 1-66
INC command, 4-10
INCLUDE command, 3-7 to 3-8
INITIALIZE QUEUE command, 1-66 to 1-67 ink overrides, 1-30 to 1-31
INPUT command, 3-8
INSERT command, 2-16 to 2-17
Interpress, 1-59 to 1-65
Interpress Font Utility, see IFU
J
JOBS command, 1-67 to 1-72
K
Kanji font, 3-2
KEYS command, 2-17
L labeled tape, see tape laser image alignment, 1-10 to 1-11
LIST command editor, 2-17 system, 1-72 to 1-73 log file, system console, 1-21 to 1-25
LOGON command, 1-73 to 1-74 logos color format, 1-29 to 1-31 printing sample, 1-87 to 1-88 tape file format, 1-58
LPS editor, see editor
M magnetic tape, see tape
MBAIS data, 1-29 memory, reallocating, 1-43 to 1-44
MERGE command editor, 2-17 system, 1-74 messages, system, 1-21 to 1-25
MODIFY command, 2-17 to 2-18
MOVE command editor, 2-18 system, 1-74 to 1-75
MOVE# command, 1-75 multiple copies, forms, 1-88 multiple volume, writing, 1-17, 1-61
N
NOCONVERT command, 2-18
NOSHOW command, 4-10
O
O command, 2-18 to 2-19
OCS command, 1-76
OCTAL command, 3-8
OFFLINE command, 1-76
ONLINE command, 1-77
OPEN command, 3-8
Operating System Software, see OSS
OSS, 1-61, 1-76, 4-4
OSS RESET command, 1-56
INDEX-4 output trays, status, 1-79
OUTPUT command, 3-9
P
P command, 2-19 paper trays, status, 1-78 parameters, commands, 1-1
PCE command, 2-19 passwords, 1-73 to 1-74,
PAUSE command, 4-10 to 4-11 personality profile, printer, 1-28
PRINT command, 2-19 to 2-20 print queue, 1-13, 1-66 to 1-67,
1-98 to 1-101, 1-103 printed wire boards, see PWBAs printer personality profile, 1-28 status, 1-67 to 1-73, 1-77 to 1-79
Printer Subsystem Controller, see PSC command printing color, xi graphics, 1-88 to 1-89 log file, system, 1-21 to 1-25 multiple copies, forms, 1-88 truncated, 1-65
PROBLEM command, 1-77 procedure, creating font files, 3-3
PSC command, 1-77
PSTATUS command, 1-77 to 1-79
PURGE command, 1-79 to 1-80
PWBAs, 1-77 publications, see documentation, other
Q
Q-BUS-based, 1-48
QWAIT command, 4-11
R
RAD50 portion, tape label, 1-18
RCU command, 1-80 to 1-82
REALLOCATE command, 1-82 to 1-83
RECODE command, 3-9 to 3-10
REMOVE command, 2-20
RENUMBER command, 2-20
REORDER command, 3-10
REPLACE command, 2-21 to 2-22
REPORT command, 1-83 to 1-85
RESET command, 1-4, 1-85 restoring system, DSR, 1-26 to 1-27
REVIEW command editor, 2-22 system, 1-85 to 1-86
REWIND command, 1-4, 1-86
RNAME command editor, 2-22 system, 1-86
S
S command, 2-22
SAFES system, 1-11 to 1-12
SAMPLE command
XEROX 4050/4090/4450/4650 LPS COMMAND REFERENCE
INDEX graphic, 1-88 to 1-89 description, 1-86 to 1-87 font, 1-87 to 1-88 form, 1-87 to 1-88 logo, 1-87 to 1-88 multiple copies, 1-88
SAVE command, 2-23
SCALE command, 1-90
SCE command, 2-23
SCHEDULE command, 1-90 to 1-91
SCSI, 1-77
Small Computer Serial Interface, see SCSI
SECURE command, 1-91 to 1-92
SELECT command, 1-92 to 1-93
SEPARATE command, 1-93
SET QUEUE DISPLAY, 1-93
SETC command, 4-11
SETD command, 4-12
SETF command, 4-12
SETT command, 4-12
SETTIME command, 1-93
SETTMO command, 1-94
SETV command, 4-13
SFC command description, 1-94
SFC, 1-94
SFC SAVE, 1-94
SFC SFS
DISPLAY, 1-95 filename, 1-95
HARDCOPY, 1-96 to 1-97
HOST, 1-97 to 1-98
TAPE, 1-98
SFS commands
DISPLAY, 1-98 to 1-99 file-name, 1-99 to 1-100
HARDCOPY, 1-100 to 1-101
HOST, 1-101
TAPE, 1-101 to 1-102
!, 1-102
SFT command, 1-102
SHOW command, 4-13
SHOW QUEUE STATUS command, 1-103
SNA/SDLC environment, 1-47
SORT command, 2-24
SPACE n REPORTS command, 1-103 to 1-104
SPACE n PAGES command, 1-104 to 1-105
SST command, 1-11, 1-105 to 1-106
START command description, 1-106 printing, tape dump, 1-108 submitting job, 1-106 to 1-108 status display print queue, 1-98 to 1-99 time, 1-116 to 117
Status File Converter, see SFC
STEP command, 2-24 to 2-25
STITCH command, 1-109 stitcher, status, 1-79, 1-103
STOP command, 1-109
SUB DEV command, see SUBSTITUTE command, system, DEVICE
XEROX 4050/4090/4450/4650 LPS COMMAND REFERENCE
SUBSTITUTE command font editor, 3-11 system description, 1-109
DEVICE, 1-110
DEVICE DEFAULT, 1-110
DEVICE physical-device FOR keyword,
1-111 to 1-112 syntax, commands, 1-1 system backup, 1-26 to 1-27 commands entering, 1-1 to 1-2 listing, 1-6 to 1-118 summary, 1-2 to 1-5 console messages, 1-21 to 1-25 date, 1-93 restoring, 1-26 to 1-27 serial number, 1-85 software tape, 1-105 to 1-106 time, 1-93
T tape booting, 1-11 drive identifying, 1-109 keyword, assigning, 1-109, 1-111 naming, 1-111 to 1-112 file copying, 1-17 to 1-21 listing, 1-113 to 1-115 format
ACCOUNT records, 1-8 to 1-10 font file, 1-58 logo file, 1-58 positioning, 1-85, 1-113, 1-115
TAPE command, 1-113 to 1-116
TAPE EOF command, 2-25 to 2-26
TAPE ENDFILE command, 2-25 to 2-26
TAPE FIND command editor, 2-26 system, 1-113
TAPE keyword, 1-27, 1-109 to 1-116
TAPE LIST command editor, 2-27 system, 1-113 to 1-114
TAPE NEXT command editor, 2-27 system, 1-114 to 1-115
TAPE NOEOF command, 2-25 to 2-26
TAPE REWIND command editor, 2-27 system, 1-115
TAPE SKIP command editor, 2-28 system, 1-115
TAPE UNLOAD command editor, 2-28 system, 1-115
TAPE VOLINIT editor, 2-28 to 2-29
INDEX-5
INDEX system, 1-115 to 116 third party finishing devices, see finishing devices
TIME command, 1-116 to 1-117 time display, 1-116 to 1-117 setting, 1-93 trays clusters, 1-14 to 1-15 feed, 1-31 to 1-33 output, 1-92 to 1-93 truncated images, 1-65
TYPE command editor, 2-29 system, 1-118
U
UNIBUS-based, 1-48 unlabeled tape, see magnetic tape user names, see ACCOUNT command
V
V3.8, see DCU command
V option, see COMPRESS command
VAX-B1-based, 1-48
VAX/MVS system, 1-48 verification process, 1-15 to 1-16
W
WAIT command, 4-13 to 4-14
X
XDDI commands, see DCU command performing FCU, 1-30 printing, xi
Xerox Network Systems, see XNS
Xerox Printer Access Facility, see XPAF
XNS communication mode, 1-48 echo test, 1-50 file transfers, 1-53
XPAF, 1-48, 1-50, 1-56
XPF, see XPAF
XPS, 1-50
XPSM, 1-50
INDEX-6 XEROX 4050/4090/4450/4650 LPS COMMAND REFERENCE
advertisement
* Your assessment is very important for improving the workof artificial intelligence, which forms the content of this project
Related manuals
advertisement
Table of contents
- 3 Table of contents
- 3 Introduction
- 3 System commands
- 9 Introduction
- 9 Conventions
- 13 System commands
- 13 Entering commands
- 18 ABORT
- 19 ACCOUNT
- 23 BC, BT, and BX
- 23 BD
- 24 BF
- 24 CANCEL
- 24 CANCEL ENTRY
- 25 CLEAR QUEUE
- 26 CLP and CLUSTER
- 27 COMPRESS
- 29 COPY
- 33 DCU
- 37 DELETE
- 38 DRAIN
- 38 DSR
- 39 EDIT
- 40 ENDJOB
- 40 FCG
- 41 FCHECK
- 41 FCU
- 45 FEX
- 45 FID
- 46 FILE
- 48 FIX
- 48 FLF
- 55 FONTS
- 55 FORMS
- 56 GRAPHIC
- 56 HARDCOPY
- 57 HIP
- 57 HIP ABORT
- 58 HIP CHANGE
- 58 HIP DIAG
- 59 HIP END or HIP EXIT
- 59 HIP HOST
- 60 HIP JOBS
- 60 HIP LOG
- 61 HIP OFFLINE
- 61 HIP ONLINE
- 61 HIP RESET
- 61 HIP SEND
- 62 HIP SHOW BUFFER
- 62 HIP SHOW ECHO SERVERS
- 62 HIP SHOW HOSTS
- 62 HIP SHOW JOBS or HIP JOBS
- 68 HIP SJC
- 68 HIP SLC
- 68 HIP START or HIP ONLINE
- 68 HIP STOP
- 69 HOSTCOPY
- 77 IMAGE
- 78 INITIALIZE QUEUE
- 79 JOBS
- 84 LIST
- 85 LOGON
- 87 MOVE #
- 88 OCS
- 89 ONLINE
- 89 PROBLEM
- 89 PSC
- 89 PSTATUS
- 92 RCU
- 94 REALLOCATE
- 97 RESET
- 97 REVIEW
- 98 REWIND
- 98 RNAME
- 98 SAMPLE
- 102 SCALE
- 102 SCHEDULE
- 103 SECURE
- 104 SELECT
- 105 SEPARATE
- 105 SET QUEUE DISPLAY
- 105 SETTIME
- 106 @SETTMO
- 106 SFC
- 110 SFS DISPLAY
- 111 SFS
- 112 SFS HARDCOPY
- 113 SFS HOST
- 113 SFS TAPE
- 114 SFS!
- 114 SFT
- 115 SHOW QUEUE STATUS
- 116 SPACE PAGES
- 117 SST
- 118 START
- 121 STITCH
- 121 STOP
- 121 SUBSTITUTE
- 125 TAPE or CARTRIDGE FIND
- 125 TAPE or CARTRIDGE LIST
- 126 TAPE or CARTRIDGE NEXT
- 127 TAPE or CARTRIDGE REWIND
- 127 TAPE or CARTRIDGE SKIP
- 127 TAPE or CARTRIDGE UNLOAD
- 127 TAPE or CARTRIDGE VOLINIT
- 128 TIME
- 130 TYPE
- 131 Editor commands
- 131 LPS editor
- 139 C
- 139 CE
- 139 CLEAR
- 140 CONVERT
- 140 COPY
- 141 D
- 141 DELETE
- 142 DISPLAY
- 142 DUPLICATE
- 143 EDIT
- 143 END
- 143 F
- 144 FID
- 144 FILE
- 145 FIND
- 145 FLOPPY
- 145 GET
- 146 GPCE
- 146 INSERT
- 147 KEYS
- 147 LIST
- 147 MERGE
- 147 MODIFY
- 148 MOVE
- 148 NOCONVERT
- 148 O
- 149 P
- 149 PCE
- 149 PRINT
- 150 REMOVE
- 150 RENUMBER
- 151 REPLACE
- 152 REVIEW
- 152 RNAME
- 152 S
- 153 SAVE
- 153 SCE
- 154 SORT
- 154 STEP
- 155 TAPE or CARTRIDGE EOF or NOEOF or ENDFILE
- 156 TAPE or CARTRIDGE FIND
- 157 TAPE or CARTRIDGE LIST
- 157 TAPE or CARTRIDGE NEXT
- 157 TAPE or CARTRIDGE REWIND
- 158 TAPE or CARTRIDGE SKIP
- 158 TAPE or CARTRIDGE UNLOAD
- 158 TAPE or CARTRIDGE VOLINIT
- 159 TYPE
- 161 Font editor commands
- 161 Font editor
- 166 CHARACTER
- 166 CLOSE
- 166 END
- 167 FEDIT
- 167 HEXADECIMAL
- 167 INCLUDE
- 168 INPUT
- 168 OCTAL
- 168 OPEN
- 169 OUTPUT
- 169 RECODE
- 170 REORDER
- 171 SUBSTITUTE
- 173 Command file commands
- 173 Command file overview
- 176 *
- 176 ;
- 176 @command-file.CMD
- 176 ASK
- 177 ASKS
- 177 ASKV
- 178 BCP
- 179 BNZ
- 179 BR
- 180 BT
- 180 BX
- 181 CHAIN
- 181 DEC
- 181 DELAY
- 181 EXIT
- 182 HOME
- 182 INC
- 182 NOSHOW
- 182 PAUSE
- 183 QWAIT
- 184 SETD
- 184 SETF
- 184 SETT
- 185 SETV
- 185 SHOW
- 185 WAIT
- 187 Glossary
- 195 Index